JP2021122625A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which is improved in performance control.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that a state can be controlled to a time shortening state C when a special condition is established when an updated rescue time time shortening number counter becomes 0 corresponding to 800 times as a variation execution number, and the game machine can execute a special suggestive performance related to establishment of a special condition. The game machine can restrict execution of a read-ahead notice performance in which variation after variation in which the special condition is established, is a notice object, out of variation corresponding to reservation information stored before establishment of the special condition, and in a prescribed period until the rescue time time shortening number counter reaches 0 from 10 corresponding to 790 times as an execution number of variation, execution of the read-ahead notice performance, is restricted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-32

Description

The present invention executes a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information, and can control a pachinko machine or a slot that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the derivation display of the specific display result. Regarding gaming machines such as machines.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display area capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display area, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) that is configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information in the variable display area, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display area, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display areas is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the payout of prize balls and the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine are advantageous for the player who is likely to win a prize, and are advantageous for the player. It is to generate the right to become a state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol (identification information) started in the variable display area based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which the hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display area, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left middle right symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop or shake in a state that matches the specific display result. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed in the variable display area is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In addition, the number of fluctuations of the symbol is counted, and based on the fact that the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit (that is, the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without the occurrence of a big hit). Some were controlled to a probabilistic state (based on 1000) fluctuations. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time-saving state in which the symbol variation is frequently executed) based on the count result reaching a specific value (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449 (paragraph 0133, FIG. 7)

However, there is room for improvement in the effect control in the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having improved effect control.

The gaming machine according to the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and executes a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). ) Is derived and displayed, and is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the starting condition (for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Variable display execution means (for example, game control) capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the game ball winning) and the start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor the variable state) is satisfied. (Part of executing steps S110 to S113 in the microcomputer 100) and a hold storage means (for example, first hold storage) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Before the decision by the decision means (for example, the part that executes step 113IWS63 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the decision means that can decide to control to the advantageous state (for example, the number buffer, the second reserved storage number buffer). It is suggested that the determination means that can be determined to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the portion that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the determination means that can determine that the control is controlled to the advantageous state are controlled to the advantageous state. Specific suggestion effect (for example, look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect. Specific example of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to countdown display, but also an effect of stopping and displaying a special decorative pattern (chance eye), a color and shape of a hold display. A specific suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a hold change effect that changes the effect, a zone effect that displays a special background, or the like). A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than a normal state (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that is controlled to the time saving state A by performing step 113IWS537). A part that controls the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166, a part that controls the time saving state C by performing step 113IWS171B), and an updating means (for example, a game) that can update numerical information (for example, a relief time saving number counter). The part of the control microcomputer 100 in which step 113IWS71 is performed. ), And the updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a game control microcomputer). 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes), and the state control means uses the numerical information updated by the update means as the special number of times the variable display is executed. By setting a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to (for example, 800 times), it is possible to control the special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a game control micro). The computer 100 executes steps 113IWS74, S75, and S171B), and a special suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a special suggestion effect (for example, a fanning effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, and a telop display effect) related to the establishment of the special condition. (For example, a portion for executing steps 113IWS804, S806, S254 in the effect control CPU 120) is further provided, and the specific suggestion effect execution means is among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to limit the execution of the specific suggestion effect for which the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is to be announced (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 113IWS1015, the 113IWS1019 is not executed. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect straddling before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time is prohibited), and the numerical information updated by the updating means corresponds to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) less than the special number of times. In a predetermined period from a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is “10”) to reaching a specific value, execution of the specific suggestion effect is restricted (for example, Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120). In this case, by not executing 113IWS1019, the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect of the first aspect in the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction is prohibited). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and to suppress the deterioration of the interest while avoiding the occurrence of defects in the production.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 113IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity, and the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 113IW. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the external output signal which is output to the outside. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the test signal which is output to the outside. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the test signal which is output to the outside. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example which concerns the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing example which concerns the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the state transition in the feature part 113IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting demo production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the telop display execution lottery table, and the telop display mode determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the look-ahead notice production execution lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice production execution lottery table, and the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. This is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the control timing at the time of transitioning from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example at the time of performing the countdown effect and effect effect from the timing other than the case where the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened to 10 times. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example when it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the countdown display for reaching the variation number of relief time shortening, and the display example of the countdown display as a look-ahead notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the customer waiting demo production. This is a timing chart when a power failure occurs immediately before the rescue time is reached. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect execution lottery table, a setting suggestion effect mode determination lottery table, a telop display execution execution lottery table, and a telop display mode determination lottery table in the first modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 113IW)
Next, the feature portion 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 113IW, the game state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic state (also controlled in the time saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will be hit by the average in the ordinary game. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time saving state, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased as compared with the normal state and the time saving state. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the probabilistic change state or the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on what has been done.

Further, in this example, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after the big hit occurs, the next big hit Even if this does not occur, it may be controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving). This relief time reduction is provided to rescue a player who has played a game for a long period of time but has not generated a big hit (for example, to suppress investment in the game). , It is a game state called "play time".

Hereinafter, the time saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a big hit is "time saving state A" or "time saving state via a big hit", and the time saving state controlled based on the stop of the time saving symbol is "time saving state". "B" or "time saving state via time saving loss", in this example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a big hit occurs, a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) The time saving state that is controlled when the next big hit does not occur even after the fluctuation display is finished may be referred to as "time saving state C" or "time saving state via relief time saving".

In the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). Control to lengthen and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of those (1) to (4) may be controlled, or (1) to (1) to It is not necessary to control a part of (4). For example, which of the following (1) to (4) may be controlled may differ between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, the probability of hitting a normal figure in a non-time saving state (normal state) is set to 100% (no deviation of the normal figure), or the probability of hitting a normal figure is substantially set to 100% by making the probability of losing the normal figure extremely low. In the time saving state, part or all of (2) to (4) may be controlled without controlling (1) (that is, without changing the probability of hitting a normal figure from the non-time saving state). good.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are defined as follows.

2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. In this example, since the jackpot probability is different for each set value s, the number of fluctuations ns (set value s: 1 to 6) for each set value is as follows. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "1" is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5-957. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "2" is about 1/310, the number of fluctuations n2 is 775 to 930. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "3" is about 1/300, the number of fluctuations n3 is 750 to 900. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "4" is about 1/290, the number of fluctuations n4 is 725 to 870. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "5" is about 1/280, the number of fluctuations n5 is 700 to 840. Since the jackpot probability when the set value is "6" is about 1/270, the number of fluctuations n6 is 675 to 810. Then, the following description will be given assuming that "800", which can be applied regardless of which set value is set, is set as the number of fluctuations n. Similarly, "800", which can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, is set as the time saving number N.

In addition, as the number of fluctuations n, a value that can be applied regardless of which set value is set is set, but it corresponds to the case where the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability is set. Any value may be set as long as the value to be obtained (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5-957) is set. That is, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, as the time reduction frequency N, a value that can be applied regardless of which set value is set is set, but it corresponds to the case where the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability is set. Any value that can be set may be used.

In this example, it is assumed that the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are the same value of 800, but the number of fluctuations n> the number of time reductions N may be satisfied, or conversely, the number of fluctuations n <the number of time reductions N may be satisfied. good.

(Board composition)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 113IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 113IW, in addition to the board surface configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed LED 113IW10 is provided below the normal drawing hold indicator 25C. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed notification LED 113IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, the fourth symbol display 113IW21a and 21b are provided on the left side and the right side of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth symbol display 113IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 113IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display 113IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the two LEDs are alternately turned on and off to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol. NS.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 113IW, instead of the passing gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a passing game ball can pass to the right side of the image display device 5. A gate 113IW41 is provided. In the feature unit 113IW, the normal drawing game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 113IW41. Therefore, in this feature unit 113IW, since the probability of hitting a normal figure increases in a probabilistic state or a time saving state, it is better to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side (right side area) of the game area. It is advantageous. On the other hand, in the main feature unit 113IW, in the normal state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side (left side area) of the game area.

Further, although not shown, a probability variation region that can be controlled in an open state and a closed state is provided in the large winning opening. The probability variation region is controlled to the open state at a predetermined timing in the jackpot game state, and is controlled to the probability variation state based on the passage of the game ball through the probability variation region controlled to the open state.

Although not shown, the main board 11 has a space for mounting an external output signal terminal for outputting an external output signal, which will be described later, and a land required for soldering the external output signal terminal. , A wiring pattern for connecting the land and the CPU 103 is provided. External output signal terminals are attached and detached as needed.

(Big hit probability, time saving loss probability)
8-2 and 8-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 8-2 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 8-3 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 (A) and 8-3 (A), the non-probability change state (low) is performed both when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536" (about 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "242/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/270), which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B), the probability change state (probability change state) in both the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. In the high probability state), the case where the set value is "1" is the lowest (about 1/32) with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2420/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/27), which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the probabilistic state as compared with the non-probability state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "328/65536" (about 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time reduction is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, even when the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value as described above and the time reduction probability is set to be constant, no time reduction is lost. By making the probabilities different for the set values "1" to "6", the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured to be controllable to a small hit game state. When the small hit is also determinable, for example, the small hit probability may be constant regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6".

Further, when the small hit is also configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a small hit with a time reduction that is controlled to a time reduction state triggered by the small hit.

The examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are examples, and various modes can be considered as methods for setting the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol. When the display is executed, the case where the time saving loss probability is about 1/200 is shown, but conversely, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/200. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the time saving loss probability may be configured to be about 1/400.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-4 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to either "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to either "10R jackpot A" or "10R jackpot B".

"10R jackpot A" is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds, shifts to a probability variation state when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the jackpot gaming state, and shifts to a time saving state when the ball does not pass. It is a big hit to make. In "10R jackpot A", the period in which the probability variation region is controlled to the open state is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, so that the jackpot is a type in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the probability variation region.

"10R jackpot B" is controlled to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds, shifts to a probability change state when the game ball does not pass through the probability change area during the jackpot game state, and is a time saving state when the game ball does not pass. It is a big hit to shift to. In "10R jackpot B", the period in which the probability variation region is controlled to the open state is as long as 10 seconds, so that the jackpot is a type in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the probability variation region.

When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is finished or the next big hit occurs. After shifting to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as "10R big hit A" with a probability of 40%, and 60%. It is determined as "10R jackpot B" with the probability of. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), in this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as "10R big hit A" with a probability of 17%. It is determined as "10R jackpot B" with a probability of 83%.

FIG. 8-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in this example, when a 10R jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not win in the probability variation region, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 times, and the 10R jackpot B is set. When it occurs and the game ball wins in the probability change area, it is controlled to a time saving state (probability change state) until the next big hit. Further, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times. In the high base state (probability change state, time saving state), even if the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state transition control is not performed (the time saving state is not controlled to 100 times of time saving). This is because it does not reduce the degree of relief of the player. For example, if the time-saving state is controlled to continue until the next big hit, the time-saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed, and the control is re-controlled to the time-saving state of 100 times. , It is not preferable because it controls from a state that is advantageous to the player to a state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is configured to control the time saving state to the time saving state of 100 times of the time saving number only when the gaming state controlled when the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed is the normal state.

Further, when the fluctuation is performed 800 times without being controlled by the big hit, the time reduction state is controlled to the time reduction state (relief time reduction) of 800 times.

FIG. 8-5 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value. The relief time reduction arrival rate is the rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by fluctuating n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated in this way.

K = (1-ML) ⁿ = {(P-1) ÷ P} ⁿ
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, P = Big hit probability ML denominator, n = Number of fluctuations)

Specifically, for example, if the set value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the set value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

(Variation pattern table)
8-6 and 8-7 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 113IW. Of these, FIG. 8-6 (A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for big hits excluding the relief time shortening rush fluctuation. Further, FIG. 8-6 (B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-6 (C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 8-6 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for the time saving state, which is controlled via the time saving time loss.

Further, FIG. 8-6 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Further, FIGS. 8-7 (F) and 8-7 (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for deviation within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 8-7 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. Further, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 8-7 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more.

If the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in FIGS. 8-7 (F) and (G). In the period from the RAM clear to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) even if the fluctuation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Is.

Further, FIG. 8-7 (H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for deviation in the probabilistic state. However, in this example, even in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, when the number of reserved storages is not 1 or more (when there is no reserved storage), the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table B.

Further, FIGS. 8-7 (I) and 8-7 (J) show specific examples of the variation pattern tables I and J for the deviation in the relief time shortened inrush variation. Of these, the variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 8-7 (I) is a variation pattern table selected in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, the fluctuation pattern table J shown in FIG. 8-7 (J) is a fluctuation pattern table selected when the time is shortened.

If there is a deviation in the relief time reduction rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables I and J shown in FIGS. 8-7 (I) and (J), but the RAM is cleared. In the period from the break to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected by using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) even if the relief time shortening rush fluctuation is out of order.

Further, FIGS. 8-7 (K) and 8-7 (L) show specific examples of the fluctuation pattern tables K and L for the jackpot in the relief time shortening rush fluctuation. Of these, the variation pattern table K shown in FIG. 8-7 (K) is a variation pattern table selected in the non-time saving state (normal state). Further, the fluctuation pattern table L shown in FIG. 8-7 (L) is a fluctuation pattern table selected when the time is shortened.

When a big hit occurs in the relief time reduction rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in FIGS. 8-7 (K) and (L), but the RAM is cleared. In the period from the break to the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected by using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 8-6 (A) even when the big hit occurs in the relief time shortening rush fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PB2. It is determined to be one of -3 (super reach β). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern for big hits has a special figure fluctuation time that is 10,000 ms longer than the fluctuation pattern for misses that performs the same reach effect. This is a blessing effect that congratulates the big hit after performing a reach effect of the same length as the out-of-range fluctuation, and a re-lottery effect that makes it appear as if the lottery is being performed again (for example, 10R big hit A). This is because the jackpot symbol shown is temporarily stopped, and a re-lottery effect is performed to change the jackpot symbol to indicate the 10R jackpot B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (D), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), It is determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (E), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is used as the fluctuation pattern. , The fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 (C), 8-6 (D), and 8-6 (E), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and fluctuations occur in the time-saving state. The rate at which the pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Further, even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is 80 as compared with the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. It is as high as%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is as high as 99%, which is the same as in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation or the jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (F), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. For example, the fluctuation pattern can be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β). The probability of being determined and determined by the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is as high as 90%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (G), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern can be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β). The probability of being determined and determined by the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) is as high as 90%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (H), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). ), The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (C) and 8-6 (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the deviation fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is shorter than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state. The selection rate of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation time is high. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (C) and 8-6 (E), when determining the fluctuation pattern of the deviation fluctuation, the time saving state via the relief time saving is more reach than the time saving state via the jackpot gaming state. The selection rate of the fluctuation pattern that accompanies the effect is low. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long period of time.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (H), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90% in the probabilistic state, and the average fluctuation time is further averaged than in the time-shortened state. Is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (I), in this example, when the relief time saving rush fluctuation causes a deviation in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (time saving rush deviation) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Will be done. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 is determined, a time saving rush effect is performed to notify that the time saving state is shifted (rushing) via the relief time saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (J), in this example, when the relief time saving rush fluctuation causes a deviation in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (time saving promotion loss) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. NS. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 is determined, the time saving promotion effect for notifying the transition to the time saving state (promotion) via the relief time saving is performed. Hereinafter, the transition from the time-saving state via the time-saving loss to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving may be referred to as "promotion".

It should be noted that the time-saving rush effect and the time-saving promotion effect are both effects performed when the time-saving state C is controlled, but the contents of the effects are different. Specifically, in the time saving rush effect, a character string indicating that the time saving state C is controlled is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-42 (G)), while in the time saving promotion effect, the time saving state C is displayed. A character string indicating control and promotion is displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-45 (D)). Further, in the time-saving rush effect, the right-handed notification image is displayed to promote right-handed striking (see FIG. 8-42 (H)), while in the time-saving promotion effect, the right-handed notification image is not displayed. (See FIG. 8-45 (D)). In this way, the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is different between the case of being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and the case of being controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. ing. As a result, the player can be given a special feeling when the time saving state is promoted, and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the notification mode of controlling to the time saving state C is common between the case of being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C and the case of being controlled (promoted) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. May be good. For example, in any case, the variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected and the time saving rush effect may be performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of fluctuation patterns and the number of effect data, and save the storage capacity.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (K), in this example, when the relief time saving rush fluctuation causes a big hit in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (time saving rush rush big hit). It is determined. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-3 is determined, a time-saving rush effect is performed to notify the transition to the time-saving state (rushing) via the relief time-saving, and then a big hit is notified and a blessing effect is produced. And re-lottery production will be performed. It should be noted that the effect performed after the time-saving rush effect may be an effect that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but an effect that is not executed when another variation pattern is selected. This may make the player feel unexpected or special.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (L), in this example, when a big hit occurs due to the relief time saving rush fluctuation in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 (time saving promotion pretending big hit). It is determined. When the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 is determined, after the time reduction promotion effect is performed to notify the transition to the time reduction state (promotion) via the relief time reduction, it is notified that it is a big hit, and a blessing effect is produced. And re-lottery production will be performed. It should be noted that the effect performed after the time reduction promotion effect may be an effect that can be executed even when another variation pattern is selected, but is not executed when another variation pattern is selected. This may make the player feel unexpected or special.

In addition, although the length of the fluctuation time is different depending on the case where the relief time shortened rush fluctuation causes a deviation and the case where the relief time shortened rush fluctuation causes a big hit, the fluctuation pattern having the same length of fluctuation time or a common one. The variation pattern may be selected. As a result, the storage capacity can be saved.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7 is an example, and various modes can be considered.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (E), the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the extremely shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high during the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the fluctuation display is displayed. Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of feasible advance notice effects and look-ahead advance notice effects. For example, when the time is shortened via the relief time saving, the effect image is displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of turning on the lamp or the LED, the predetermined effect sound, or the normal effect. An effect that outputs different fluctuating stop sounds is executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is provided, but the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is not provided, for example, via the jackpot. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 8-6 (C)) in the time saving state.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case of switching to the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 8-7 (F) and (G)) is shown. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or the number of divisions such as 100 or 200 remaining fluctuations. Only in the case of, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested.

(Direction control command)
8-8 and 8-9 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-8 and 8-9, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is out of line (no time reduction). be.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time reduction loss designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is set to the time reduction deviation.

The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (10R jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R jackpot A. .. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (10R jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is 10R jackpot B. ..

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, the value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, the command is transmitted. The command 957E (H) is transmitted as a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and the command is uniformly designated as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is transmitted to.

The command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief times 2, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 700, the command is transmitted. The command 9607 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of times of relief time reduction 1.

The command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration) that specifies the number of remaining fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration is set with a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the time for relief is shortened and transmitted. For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief time reductions at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, the command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and when the remaining number of times is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the two commands can be identifiable and transmitted in units of one time.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by one. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is lost. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state at the time of relief time reduction. The command E004 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state specification command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability change state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) for designating the start of right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) for designating the end of the right-handed notification.

The command F000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (set value command) indicating that the set value indicated by XX is set. For example, a setting value command (F101 (H)) that specifies a setting value "1" when the setting value is "1", and a setting value command (F102) that specifies a setting value "2" when the setting value is "2". When (H)) is the setting value "3", the setting value command (F103 (H)) for specifying the setting value "3" is set to specify the setting value "4" when the setting value is "4". When the value command (F104 (H)) is the set value "5", the set value "5" is specified. When the set value command (F105 (H)) is the set value "6", the set value is "6". A setting value command (F106 (H)) for specifying is transmitted.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-8 and 8-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-8 and 8-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the feature unit 113IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Control is performed so that a value corresponding to the value of the current relief time reduction counter is set and a recovery relief time reduction specification command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS11). For example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9701 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9708 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed and the recovery process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time is shortened. The number of fluctuations is notified.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted.

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 113IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if a big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the shortened state. Will be. In this example, the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter can be specified based on the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such a mode. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state where the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day is continued, so that the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is not initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

If the output signal from the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on, the hold storage information and the time reduction flag information are initialized in step S8, and the relief time reduction counter is also initialized in step 113IWS12. On the other hand, at the time of recovery from the power failure, the hold storage information, the time reduction flag information, and the relief time reduction counter information are backed up before the power failure occurs. As a result, for example, even if a power failure occurs at a timing immediately before reaching the relief time reduction, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-50, four hold memories are stored, and the power is cut off during the execution of the 799th fluctuation (relief time reduction counter = 1) since the previous jackpot control. If the hold storage information, the time reduction flag information, and the relief time reduction counter information are initialized when the power is restored from the power failure, it is decided to control the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Even though it was (the memory on hold corresponding to the 800th fluctuation was stored), it will not be controlled to the time saving state after recovering from the power failure, which will be disadvantageous to the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not initializing the hold storage information, the time reduction flag information, and the relief time reduction counter information at the time of recovery from the power failure.

In this example, when the output signal from the clear switch is on, the configuration is such that the relief time reduction counter information is also initialized (step 113IWS12), but the output signal from the clear switch is on. In this case, the hold storage information and the time reduction flag information may be initialized, and the relief time reduction counter information may not be initialized. Specifically, by performing the process of step S8, the hold storage information and the time saving flag information may be initialized, but the process of step 113IWS12 may not be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game store from intentionally initializing the relief time reduction counter information, and it is possible to guarantee the degree of relief of the player.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 8-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature unit 113IW. In the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature unit 113IW, after step S27, the CPU 103 can confirm the control state of the gaming machine with a test device (a device used for performing an actual shooting test of the gaming machine) outside the gaming machine. In order to do so, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal is performed (step 113IWS28). By making it possible to specify the internal state of the gaming machine in the test device, it is possible to smoothly perform the actual shooting test of the gaming machine. The main board 11 is electrically connected to a space for mounting a test signal terminal for outputting a test signal, a land required for soldering the test signal terminal, and the land and the CPU 103. A wiring pattern is provided. The test signal terminals are attached and detached as needed. For example, a game machine (testing machine) for use in an actual shooting test is equipped with a test signal terminal, but a game machine (mass production machine) installed in a game store is not equipped with a test signal terminal. May be good. The CPU 103 performs the test terminal process (step 113IWS28) regardless of whether or not the test signal terminal is attached. Further, in step S23, the CPU 103 outputs the signal shown in FIG. 8-12 to an external device such as a hall management computer, an information display device for displaying game history information for each game machine, and a call lamp for calling a game clerk. Perform the processing to be performed.

(External output signal)
FIG. 8-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8-12, in this example, the external output signals include a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, a fluctuation stop signal, a security signal, a door opening signal, a prize ball signal, and The out ball signal is output. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during high base state control. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are output externally during high base state control. Further, the jackpot 4 signals are signals that are output externally during the time reduction state control via the relief time reduction. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol determination period. The security signal is a signal that is output externally when an error is detected. The door opening signal is a signal output externally when the door opening is detected. The prize ball signal is a signal that is output externally when 10 prize balls are issued. The out-ball signal is a signal that is output externally when 10 out-balls are detected. With external devices such as a hall management computer, an information display device that displays game history information for each gaming machine, and a call lamp for calling a game clerk, the number of jackpots can be measured by one jackpot signal, and one jackpot signal and a jackpot can be measured. The number of consecutive villas can be measured by 2 signals, and the number of relief time reduction controls can be measured by 4 big hit signals.

In this example, in addition to the case where the game shifts to the high base state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed because the time-saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed in the high-base state. In that case, the external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the symbol determination period. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the state may shift to the high base state. Therefore, when the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal starts at the start of the fluctuation display. Will be done. For example, in the case of shifting to the high base state when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the signal is output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot signal 2, and the time saving is shortened. It may be possible to externally identify that the time saving state has been started when the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed. Further, for example, the jackpot 2 signal is externally output during the jackpot game and during the high probability / high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are at the start of the low probability / high base state (or low probability / high base). The high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state may be externally distinguishable by being output to the outside (during the state).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened, and the variation is made at the start of the symbol confirmation period in response to the end of the variation display. A stop signal is output externally. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal that can be specified to be controlled to the high base state based on the shortened relief time to the outside at an appropriate timing. Further, when the jackpot 4 signal and the fluctuation stop signal are output, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omission outside. In addition, the number of times the relief time has been shortened can be specified externally by outputting four jackpot signals. In this way, in an external device such as a hall management computer, the trigger, timing, and number of times controlled to a high base state can be specified. Therefore, for example, the relief time reduction arrival rate and the number of relief times in actual operation have been reached. It is possible to analyze the operation of the gaming machine in the gaming store, such as what kind of customer base the player is.

In this example, when the variable display that shortens the relief time is started, the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state). For example, the relief time is shortened. When the variable display that becomes The external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the time saving state (low probability / high base state).

The big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output even during the big hit game. Further, in this example, a case where different external output signals (3 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) are output for the case where the time reduction is missed and the case where the relief time is shortened is shown, but the external output signal for both purposes is shown. May be configured to output.

Further, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal during the symbol determination period is output.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the missing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, when the fluctuation stop signal and the big hit 3 signal or the big hit 4 signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being dropped externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signals may be configured to be continuously output even in the high base state via the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output even in the high base state via the relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably discriminate the type of time reduction even in the high base state.

(Test signal)
8-13 and 8-14 are explanatory views showing an example of a test signal externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the main board 11, the gaming machine test signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), the gaming machine test signal terminal 1B shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), and the gaming machine test shown in FIG. 8-13 (C). The signal terminal 2A and the symbol data signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-14 (D) are attached.

At the gaming machine test signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), the launch position designation signal 1 to the launch position designation signal 3 are output (see pin numbers 6 to 8). For example, the launch position designation signal 1 is output (turned on) in a gaming state in which the player is expected to strike left (a gaming method in which a gaming ball is launched aiming at an area on the left side of the gaming area). It is a signal. The launch position designation signal 2 is a signal that is output (turned on) in a game state in which the player is expected to perform a middle strike (a game method in which a game ball is launched aiming at a central area of the game area). .. The launch position designation signal 3 is a signal that is output (turned on) in a gaming state in which the player is expected to make a right-handed strike. As described above, the launch position designation signals 1, 2, and 3 are signals indicating a firing state indicating to which region in the game region the game ball is launched from the hitting ball launching device.

In the gaming machine test signal terminal 1B shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), a special symbol 1 hit signal, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, a special symbol 1 time reduction signal, and a special symbol 1 time reduction signal. The symbol 1 relief count arrival signal is output (see pin numbers 20 to 24). For example, the special symbol 1 hit signal is a signal that is output (turned on) when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol (during the confirmation period). The special symbol 1 high probability state signal is a signal that is output (turned on) in the probability variation state that is controlled based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is a signal that is output (turned on) in the time saving state that is controlled based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The special symbol 1 time saving out-of-time signal is a signal that is output (turned on) when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving out-of-time symbol (during the confirmation period). The special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal is a signal that is output (turned on) when the relief time reduction variation is reached based on the variation of the first special symbol.

In the gaming machine test signal terminal 2A shown in FIG. 8-13 (C), a special symbol 2 hit signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, a special symbol 2 time reduction signal, and a special symbol 2 time reduction signal. The symbol 2 relief count arrival signal is output (see pin numbers 12 to 16). For example, the special symbol 2 hit signal is a signal that is output (turned on) when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol (during the confirmation period). The special symbol 2 high probability state signal is a signal that is output (turned on) in the probability variation state that is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is a signal that is output (turned on) in the time saving state that is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 time saving out-of-time signal is a signal that is output (turned on) when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving out-of-time symbol (during the confirmation period). The special symbol 2 relief count arrival signal is a signal that is output (turned on) when the relief time reduction variation is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol.

Further, at the gaming machine test signal terminal 2A shown in FIG. 8-13 (C), a winning easy state designation signal 1, a winning easy state designation signal 2, and a winning easy state designation signal 3 are output (pin numbers 25 to 25). See 27). For example, the winning easy state designation signal 1 is a signal that is output (turned on) when controlled in the time saving state (time saving state A) via the jackpot (when the time saving flag A is set). .. The winning easy state designation signal 2 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the time saving state (time saving state B) is controlled (when the time saving flag B is set) via the time saving deviation. The winning easy state designation signal 3 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the time saving state (time saving state C) via the relief time saving is controlled (when the time saving flag C is set).

At the symbol data signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), symbol 1 data bit 0 to symbol 1 data bit 7 and symbol 2 data bit 0 to symbol 2 data bit 7 can be output (see pin numbers 1 to 16). For example, the symbol 1 data bit0 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the first special symbol fluctuates and stops at a symbol that is out of time. The symbol 1 data bit1 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the first special symbol fluctuates and stops at a symbol that is out of time. The symbol 1 data bit2 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the first special symbol fluctuates and stops at the jackpot symbol. In this example, the symbol 1 data bit3 to the symbol 1 data bit7 are not output, but for example, the first special symbol can be stopped fluctuating at the small hit symbol, and the big hit type and the small hit type can be specified. You can do it.

For example, the symbol 2 data bit0 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the second special symbol stops fluctuating with a symbol that is out of time and has no time reduction. The symbol 2 data bit1 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the second special symbol fluctuates and stops at a symbol that is out of time. The symbol 2 data bit2 is a signal that is output (turned on) when the second special symbol stops fluctuating at the jackpot symbol. In this example, the symbol 2 data bit3 to the symbol 2 data bit7 are not output, but for example, the second special symbol can be stopped fluctuating at the small hit symbol, and the big hit type or small hit type can be specified. You can do it.

The gaming machine test signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), the gaming machine test signal terminal 1B shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), and the gaming machine test signal terminal 2A shown in FIG. 8-13 (C). In addition to the test signals described above, various signals can be output from the symbol data signal terminal 1A shown in FIG. 8-14 (D).

(Test terminal processing)
8-15 and 8-16 are flowcharts showing processing examples related to the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. Note that in FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16, the process of outputting an external output signal other than the signals shown in FIGS. 8-13 and 8-14 is omitted.

In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 first clears the bits of each signal in the test signal output buffer of the output port buffers (step 113IWS31). Then, when the jackpot symbol is being determined (Y in step 113IWS32), when the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period is in progress (Y in step 113IWS33), or when any of the time reduction flags is set (Y). In step 113IWS34 Y), the bit of the emission position designation signal 3 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS35). The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is A, a first time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is B, and a time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is C. Is done.

When neither the jackpot symbol determination period, the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period, and any time reduction flag is set (N in step 113IWS34), the bit of the emission position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer. Is set (step 113IWS36).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal state, the firing position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period is started (Y in step 113IWS32), while the time-saving out-of-time symbol is stopped in the normal state. If it is displayed, the time reduction flag B is set when the symbol stop period of the symbol that is out of time reduction ends, so that the firing position designation signal 3 is output at the end of the symbol stop period (step 113 IWS34). Y). That is, it is configured so that the switching timing of the launch position designation signal differs depending on the trigger for shifting to the time saving state.

Further, here, by switching the outputs of the launch position designation signals 1 and 3, it is possible to notify the external device (test device) of information indicating which method the player is expected to hit in the gaming state. However, by setting / resetting a single launch position designation signal, information indicating which method the player is expected to hit is informed to the external device (test device). It may be a possible configuration. For example, in the case of N in step 113IWS34, the firing position is specified by shifting to step 113IWS37 without performing the processing of step 113IWS36, or by not performing the processing of step 113IWS31 and instead of the processing of step 113IWS36. By performing the process of clearing the bit of the signal 3, information indicating which way the player is expected to hit is displayed depending on whether or not the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 is set. It may be configured so that it can be notified to an external device (test device).

Further, when the jackpot symbol determination period in the first special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the signal per special symbol (step 113IWS37B) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit2 (step 113IWS37B). Step 113 IWS37C).

Further, when the CPU 103 is in the time saving time loss symbol determination period in the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS37D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time saving time loss signal (step 113IWS37E), and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1. (Step 113IWS37F). The processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. As will be described later, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in the relief time-saving rush fluctuation, the time-saving state via the relief time-saving is preferentially controlled over the time-saving state via the time-saving time-saving. A signal indicating that the out-of-order symbol has been stopped and displayed is appropriately output to the outside.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit0 (step 113IWS37H) when the symbol determination period without time reduction in the first special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS37G).

Further, when the jackpot symbol determination period in the second special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS38A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the signal per special symbol 2 (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit2 (step 113IWS38B). Step 113 IWS38C).

Further, when the CPU 103 is in the time saving time loss symbol determination period in the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS38D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 time saving time loss signal (step 113IWS38E), and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit1. (Step 113IWS38F). The processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. As will be described later, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in the relief time-saving rush fluctuation, the time-saving state via the relief time-saving is preferentially controlled over the time-saving state via the time-saving time-saving. A signal indicating that the out-of-order symbol has been stopped and displayed is appropriately output to the outside.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit0 (step 113IWS38H) when the symbol determination period without time reduction in the second special symbol is in progress (Y in step 113IWS38G).

Further, when the relief time reduction number is reached based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal (step 113IWS39B). Further, when the relief time reduction number of times is reached based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 relief number of times arrival signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time saving flag C is set, a flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special is set based on the flag. It is possible to identify whether the number of relief times has been shortened based on the fluctuation of the symbol. In this example, when the relief time reduction number is reached based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal is instantaneously output, but the relief is based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. During the period controlled by the time saving state via the time saving, the special symbol 1 relief number arrival signal may be continuously output. Similarly, in this example, when the number of relief times is reached based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the special symbol 1 relief count arrival signal is instantaneously output, but based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. During the period controlled by the time saving state via the relief time saving, the special symbol 2 relief number arrival signal may be continuously output.

Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the probability variation state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the probability variation state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, when the probability variation flag is set, the flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special symbol is set based on the flag. It is possible to specify whether or not the probabilistic state is controlled based on the fluctuation of.

Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time saving state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41B). Further, when the CPU 103 is controlling the time saving state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time saving flag is set, the flag is set according to which of the "first" and "second" data is set in the special symbol pointer, and any special symbol is set based on the flag. It is possible to specify whether or not the probabilistic state is controlled based on the fluctuation of.

Further, when the time saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). Further, when the time saving flag B is set (Y in step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). Further, when the time saving flag C is set (Y in step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the winning easy state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). As will be described later, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, each time saving flag is reset at the stop timing of the big hit fluctuation, and the time saving flag A can be set at the end of the big hit. When the 10R jackpot A occurs, the winning easy state designation signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from the stop timing of the jackpot fluctuation to the jackpot end timing.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits each signal as a test signal to the test signal terminal by outputting the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43). By outputting the test signal in this way, the internal state of the gaming machine can be specified on the test device side.

(Special design normal processing)
8-17 and 8-18 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 113IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is confirmed. If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 113IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 113IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 113IWS54).

In the feature unit 113IW, by executing the processes of steps 113IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 113IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 113IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always extracted is the first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 113IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 113IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 113IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads a hit determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. It is a program. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is not set (if the probability variation state is low), the CPU 103 has a jackpot determination value for low probability (FIGS. 8-2 (A) and 8-3). (See (A)) is used to make a jackpot determination. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the high probability state), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B)). Make a big hit judgment. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 113IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 113IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (10R jackpot A or 10R jackpot B) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 113IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS70.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to make a big hit (N in step 113IWS63), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not any of the time saving flag A to the time saving flag C is set (step 113IWS79). If any of the time saving flag A to the time saving flag C is set (that is, if it is in the time saving state), the process proceeds to step 113IWS66. In this example, by executing the process of step 113IWS79, when the time saving state is in progress, it is determined that the time saving is lost as it is without performing the time saving deviation determination processing of step 113IWS81.

In this example, the time-saving pattern cannot be stopped when the time is shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving deviation determination (step 113IWS81) is executed even in the time saving state, and if it is determined that the time saving is out, the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed, but the game state shifts or the time-saving based on the stop of the time-saving out-of-time symbol. The number of times may not be set (disabled). In that case, although the time-saving out-of-time symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol different from the time-saving out-of-time design (for example, a time-saving no-time-out design) may be stopped and displayed as a decorative design or a small design.

If it is controlled to the time saving state C and the time saving count state B can be controlled to 100 times based on the time saving deviation symbol stopping when the value of the time saving number counter is 600, the time saving state is set. Since the number of times changes from 600 times to 100 times, the degree of relief of the player becomes low. Therefore, as described above, in the time-saving state, the time-saving out-of-time symbol cannot be stopped, or the game state transition control based on the time-saving out-of-time symbol stop is not invalidated, which is disadvantageous for the player. Is prevented from doing.

If neither of the time reduction flags is set (that is, if it is not in the time reduction state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 113IWS80). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 113IWS66. In this example, by executing the process of step 113IWS80, when it is in the probabilistic state, it is determined that the time saving is lost as it is without performing the time saving deviation determination processing of step 113IWS81.

If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses a time reduction loss determination table for determining whether or not the time reduction is lost, and a lottery process based on the time reduction deviation determination random number is used. (Step 113IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/400. (See FIG. 8-2). If the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving loss determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/200 (). See Figure 8-3).

In this example, by performing the special symbol normal processing, the relief time reduction condition (relief time reduction count counter value is subtracted) for controlling the relief time reduction regardless of the variable display result (big hit, time reduction no loss, time reduction loss). It is configured so that "0") can occur. As described above, in this example, the variable display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is completed in the time saving state A based on the big hit and in the time saving state B based on the stop of the time saving symbol. However, it is controlled to the time saving state C based on the fact that the next big hit did not occur, but when the variable display result of the fluctuation that the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a big hit, or the relief time saving condition is It is assumed that the variable display result of the established fluctuation may be out of time. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, when the variable display result of the fluctuation in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a big hit, the time saving state A is controlled based on the big hit, and the variable display of the fluctuation in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied is displayed. If the result is out of time, the time saving state C is controlled based on the relief time saving.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time reduction state is 0 (step 113IWS66). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 113IWS67), and confirms whether or not the subtracted time reduction counter value is 0 (step 113IWS68). ). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction state ends at the end of the fluctuation (step 113IWS69).

In this example, steps 113IWS66 to S69 are executed before the count processing of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 113IWS71 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. I can't be limited. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 113IWS71. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "800" in the time reduction counter (see step 113IWS172), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened. Further, it may be configured to set "801", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

After step 113IWS69, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 113IWS70Y). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (Y in step 113IWS70), the process proceeds to step 113IWS84. When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 at this point, the timing after the time reduction state (time reduction state C) via the relief time reduction has already been controlled (the time reduction state C is controlled or the time reduction state C). It is a timing in which the normal state is controlled after the fluctuation is performed 800 times in the above state), and the big hit that is the trigger for setting 800 in the relief time reduction counter is not generated. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (N in step 113IWS70), the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step 113IWS71). Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 113IWS71, regardless of whether the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 113IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 113IWS72), the CPU 103 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and issues the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 957E (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 113IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 113IWS84. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 113IWS75). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 113IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and commands 957F as a relief time reduction 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS76). Next, in the CPU 103, is the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time shortened in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times)? It is confirmed whether or not (step 113IWS77). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and directs and controls the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Control to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 113IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 700, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9607 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS84.

In this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction and transmits the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute the fanning effect and the countdown effect described later.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set “800”) at the timing when the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction is configured to be continuously generated as described later, the relief time reduction is set to the first time. It is configured to send the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command only when the relief time is reduced, and when the relief time is reduced after the second time, the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command are transmitted. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 113IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to use the 10R jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is determined to be the 10R jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "7". If it is decided that the special symbol is out of time, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is decided that it is out of time (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is "2". -"Is determined. Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 113IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 113IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
8-19 and 8-20 are flowcharts showing a variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 113IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 113IWS1702A). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, if the fluctuation is a relief time reduction), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 113IWS1702BA). At this point, the case where the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 and the relief time reduction determination flag is set is the case where the relief time is shortened, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 and the relief time is reduced. The case where the time reduction determination flag is not set is the case where the next big hit has not occurred since the relief time has already been controlled. If the rescue time reduction determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1702E. When the relief time saving determination flag is set, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag B is set (step 113IWS1702BB), and if it is not set, the CPU 103 uses FIG. 8 as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table L for jackpot shown in -7 (L) is selected (step 113IWS1702C). If the time saving flag B is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table K shown in FIG. 8-7 (K) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 113IWS1702D). Further, if the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (that is, the fluctuation does not result in the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 is used as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). (Step 113IWS1702E). In this example, the relief time reduction determination flag is not set when the time reduction state A and the time reduction state C are controlled (the condition for controlling the relief time reduction is not satisfied). Therefore, in step 113IWS1702BB. , Only the presence or absence of the set of the time saving state B is determined.

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 113IWS1702F). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, if the fluctuation is a relief time reduction), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 113IWS1702GA). At this point, the case where the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 and the relief time reduction determination flag is set is the case where the relief time is shortened, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 and the relief time is reduced. The case where the time reduction determination flag is not set is the case where the next big hit has not occurred since the relief time has already been controlled. If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1703. When the relief time saving determination flag is set, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag B is set (step 113IWS1702GB), and if it is not set, the CPU 103 uses FIG. 8 as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table I for jackpot shown in -7 (I) is selected (step 113IWS1702H). If the time saving flag B is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern table J shown in FIG. 8-7 (J) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS1702I). In this example, the relief time reduction determination flag is not set when the time reduction state A and the time reduction state C are controlled (the condition for controlling the relief time reduction is not satisfied). Therefore, in step 113IWS1702GB. , Only the presence or absence of the set of the time saving state B is determined. Further, if the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (that is, the fluctuation does not result in the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 or more and 10 or less (step). 113IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 or more and 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1 or more and 10 times or less), the CPU 103 determines the value of the total hold storage counter. Check if is 3 or less. In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter or the second hold storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage counter is 3 or less (Y in step 113IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 8-7 (F). The variation pattern table F of (step 113IWS1705) is selected. If the value of the total pending storage counter is 4 or more (N in step 113IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 8-7 (G). The variation pattern table G of (step 113IWS1706) is selected.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 1 or more and 10 or less (N in step 113IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 113IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 8-7 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 113IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 113IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 113IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 113IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation as shown in FIG. 8-6 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 113IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 113IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 8-6 (E). The variation pattern table E for the loss in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 113IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 113IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 includes a variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 113IWS1702C, S1702D, S1702E, S1702H, S1702I, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715, and a first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the variation pattern determination random number stored in, it is determined which of the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7 is used (step 113IWS1716). In this example, by determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 113IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 113IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 113IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 113IWS1720).

Although not shown, in the period from the RAM clear to the big hit, even if it is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, or if it is out of the relief time reduction rush fluctuation. , The variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table B shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). Further, in the period from the RAM clearing to the big hit, even if the big hit occurs in the relief time reduction rush fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is set using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). It is the one to choose.

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type determination result, and the time saving type if it has not been transmitted yet. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of (step 113IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step 113IWS1122), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step 113IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 113IWS1132). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot fluctuation occurs (step 113IWS1132A), and if it is a jackpot fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1137. In this way, when the relief time reduction determination flag is set in the jackpot fluctuation, the control related to the jackpot is given priority over the control related to the rescue time reduction. If the fluctuation is out of alignment, the right-handed LED 113IW10 is controlled to start lighting (step 113IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1134).

By executing the process of step 113IWS1133, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the right-handed LED 113IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" in the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 113IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step 113IWS1132, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time (step 113IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 113IWS85.

If it is determined that the time is out of time, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 113IW10 (step 113IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 113IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 113IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" in the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 113IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1139.

Unless it is decided to be out of time (N in step 113IWS1124), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to "0". A value corresponding to ".5 seconds" is set (step 113IWS1137). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS1138). .. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S113) (step 113IWS1139). As described above, by preferentially performing the process for controlling the relief time reduction (step 113IWS1132 to S1136) over the process for controlling the time reduction out-of-time symbol (steps 113IWS1124 to S1129), the relief time can be shortened. When the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving state is controlled in preference to the time-saving state via the time-saving time-saving.

(Special symbol stop processing)
8-22 and 8-23 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 113IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 113IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop process is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 113IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, executes the probability change flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the time saving flag C, the relief time saving determination flag, and the number of times of the variation display during the time saving state. Reset the time reduction counter for counting (step 113IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 113IWS135). Therefore, in this example, if "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit and the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the big hit game is completed, the relief time reduction It will be controlled in a short time state.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 113IWS135, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit and the initial setting is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 113IW10 (step 113IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 113IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 113IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 113IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the rescue time reduction determination flag is set (step 113IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 113IWS171), resets the time reduction flag if it is set (step 113IWS171A), sets the time reduction flag C, and sets the time reduction flag C. It is controlled to shorten the time (step 113IWS171B). Then, "800" is set in the time reduction counter (step 113IWS172). Although not shown, in step 113IWS171A, if it is set, the time saving end flag is also reset. Here, the case where the time saving end flag is set is a case where both the value of the time saving number counter and the value of the relief time saving counter become 0 in one fluctuation. For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the time reduction out-of-time symbol is stopped and controlled to the time reduction state B.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS174). After that, the process proceeds to step 113IWS175.

In this example, the relief time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state at the timing when the relief time is shortened, and then the relief time reduction is performed at the timing when the 800-time fluctuation display is finished and the relief time is controlled to the normal state. Although the case where the count counter is set (see step 113IWS144) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to control the time reduction state at the timing when the relief time is shortened and to set the relief time reduction counter (set “800”). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously generate the relief time reduction, and once the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state can be continued until a big hit occurs.

Further, in this example, "800" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, "0" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is added by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "800". Based on this, it may be configured to generate a reduction in relief time.

Further, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds longer than usual is set as the symbol confirmation period to secure an effect period such as a mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decorative symbol may not be displayed, but only the small symbol may be displayed so that the small symbol is not concealed by the effecting object or the like.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 113IWS172, 800 times, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such a mode. No. For example, in step 113IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time reduction counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 113IWS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be set in the time reduction counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "800" is set in the time reduction counter. May be good.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 113IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 800 times with a probability of 90%. When determining the number of time reductions by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Further, if the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step 113IWS170, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time (step 113IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 113IWS85.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 113IWS164). Next, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 113IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS168). After that, the process proceeds to step 113IWS175.

By executing the processing of steps 113IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image can be switched according to the time saving state via the time saving deviation. Further, by executing the process of step 113IWS169, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started at the end of the symbol determination period.

Unless it is determined in step 113IWS153 that the time reduction is out of time, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction end flag is set (step 113IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 113IWS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 113IWS145). Then, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 113IW10 (step 113IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS175.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 113IWS141 to S152, the time saving final variation shifts to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and ends the right-handed notification. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-handed notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol determination period.

If the time saving end flag is not set in step 113IWS141 (N in step 113IWS141), the process proceeds to step 113IWS175.

In step 113IWS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 113IWS175).

In this way, by executing the processes of steps 113IWS170 to S174 with priority over the processes of steps 113IWS153 to S168, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in the relief time-saving rush variation, the time-saving state B via the time-saving loss is displayed. It is configured to be preferentially controlled to the time saving state C via the relief time saving. Further, the time saving state B via the time saving loss is controlled to the time saving state B of 100 times, while the time saving state C via the relief time saving is controlled to the time saving state B of 800 times, which is more advantageous than the time saving state B. Therefore, the player can be rescued even when the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in the relief time saving rush fluctuation.

Further, since the processes of steps 113IWS170 to S174 can be executed even when the time saving state B is controlled, it is possible to control (promote) from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. ..

FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing a jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) executed before each round in the jackpot game. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big winning opening pre-opening timer by -1 (step 113IWS1401). When the timer before opening the large winning opening times out (the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening is 0) (step 113IWS1402), the CPU 103 initializes the winning number counter (step 113IWS1403). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0. Further, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the round number counter (step 113IWS1405).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the round in the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the winning opening (step 113IWS1409). Next, the CPU 103 controls the probability variation region to the open state when the starting round is eight rounds (step 113IWS1410A, S1410B). Then, the large winning opening is controlled to be in an open state (step 113IWS1410C). Specifically, the solenoid 82 is driven to control the large winning opening in an open state.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value of the current round number counter in the EXT data, and controls the effect control board 12 to transmit the designated command during the opening of the winning opening (step 113IWS1411).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process during jackpot opening (step 113IWS306) (step 113IWS1412).

FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing the process during jackpot opening (step S115). In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the probability-changing area switch that detects the winning of the game ball in the probability-changing area is turned on, that is, whether or not the winning of the game ball in the probability-changing area is detected. It is determined (step 113IWS1450A), and if it is not turned on, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1451. If the probabilistic region switch is turned on, control is performed to send a probabilistic region winning designation command to the effect control board 12 (step 113IWS1450B). It should be noted that, at a timing other than the round in which the winning of the game ball in the probabilistic region may occur, even if the probabilistic region switch is turned on, the winning of the game ball in the probabilistic region may be invalidated. .. For example, even if it is Y of step 113IWS1450A, if it is a round other than 8 rounds in 10R jackpots A and B (round number counter = 1 to 7, 9, 10), step 113IWS1450B may not be performed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the probability variation region (step 113IWS1450C), and if it is not the closing timing, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1451. If it is the closing timing, the probability variation region is controlled to the closed state (step 113IWS1450D). The closing timing of the probability variation region is 0.1 seconds after the start of the 8-round round game for the 10R jackpot A, and after the start of the 8-round round game for the 10R jackpot B. 10 seconds later.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the count switch has been input (step 113IWS1451). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the detection signal from the count switch 23 has been input. Then, when the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected (Y in step 113IWS1451), the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step 113IWS1452). Then, when the value of the winning number counter after addition becomes 10 (step 113IWS1453), the CPU 103 shifts to step 113IWS1459.

If the value of the winning number counter is less than 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the opening / closing time timer (step 113IWS1454) and confirms whether or not the opening / closing time timer has timed out (step 113IWS1455). If the open / close time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is. If the open / close time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1459.

In step 113IWS1459, the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening to be closed (step 113IWS1459), and proceeds to step 113IWS1460. Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 82 is stopped to control the large winning opening in a closed state.

Step 113 When shifting to IWS1460, the CPU 103 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the current round number counter in the EXT data, and controls to send a designated command to the effect control board 12 after opening the big winning opening (step 113IWS1460).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step 113IWS305) (step 113IWS1465).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 8-26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 113IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 113IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 113IWS532) and controls the transmission of the jackpot end designation command (step 113IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the big hit end display timer (step 113IWS534), and performs the process. finish.

In step 113 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 113IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 113IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 113IWS537).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation region in the jackpot game state (step 113IWS538). Specifically, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area, a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area is set, and here, if the flag is set, the game ball moves through the probability variation area. On the other hand, if the flag is not set, it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation region. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change area in the jackpot game state, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag to shift the game state to the probability change state (step 113IWS541), and resets the value of the time reduction counter to 0. (Step 113IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS543). Then, the process proceeds to step step 113IWS544.

Further, if the game ball has not passed through the probability variation region in the jackpot game state, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 113IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state A designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 113IWS540).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 113IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in the feature unit 113IW will be described. FIG. 8-27 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature unit 113IW. As shown in FIG. 8-27, in the normal state, when the 10R jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation region, the probability variation state is controlled (see step 113IWS541), and when the 10R jackpot A occurs, the probability variation state is controlled. Alternatively, when the 10R jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). Further, in the normal state, even if the symbol is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving deviation) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 113IWS166). Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing, after the big hit, and when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit), the time is shortened. It is controlled to C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 113IWS173).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the 10R jackpot B is generated and the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the probability variation state, the probability variation state is controlled again (see step 113IWS541), and the 10R jackpot A is generated. If this is the case, or if the 10R jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 113IWS80), and the relief time is not shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the 10R jackpot B is generated and the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the time saving state A, the probability variation state is controlled (see step 113IWS541), and the 10R jackpot A is generated. If this is the case, or if the 10R jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled again (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state A, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 113IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state A, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 113IWS79), and the relief time is not shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the 10R jackpot B is generated and the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the time saving state B, the probability variation state is controlled (see step 113IWS541), and the 10R jackpot A is generated. If this is the case, or if the 10R jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state A, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 113IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 113IWS79). Furthermore, even if there is no time reduction, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clear processing, after the big hit, and when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit). It is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 113IWS173).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the 10R jackpot B is generated and the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the time saving state C, the probability variation state is controlled (see step 113IWS541), and the 10R jackpot A is generated. If this is the case, or if the 10R jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, it is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 113IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 113IWS79), and in the time saving state C, when 800 times of fluctuation display is completed without a big hit. It is controlled to the normal state (see steps 113IWS66 to S69 and S145).

In this example, when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not win a prize in the probability variation region, the case where the game ball uniformly shifts to the time saving state A is shown, but only in such a control mode. I can't. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time reduction with the number of time reductions corresponding to the case where the game ball does not win in the probability variation area (100 times in this example), and the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger. For example, the current time saving state B may be continued as it is.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-28 to 8-29 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 113IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 113IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 113IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 113IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 113IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 113IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 113IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 113IWS618). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation A designation command, 1st symbol confirmation B designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation A designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation B designation command) ( Step 113IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 113IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the second confirmation B command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 113IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 113IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 113IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 113IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 1 designation command (step 113IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 1 designation command to the relief time reduction 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 113IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 2 designation command (step 113IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 2 designation command to the relief time reduction 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 113IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a recovery time reduction time reduction command (step 113IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 reaches the relief time reduction in the image display device 5 based on the received recovery time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to display the initial result according to the number of times (step 113IWS630). For example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "01 (H)" (when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100 or less), the initial result is "112". Is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial stage. "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial state "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

It should be noted that not only when the initial result suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first variation display after power restoration, a display suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed. , A combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Further, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power restoration, a display suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, a combination of symbols suggesting the remaining fluctuations, and the like are displayed after the power restoration. The suggestion display may be configured at a relatively early stage.

If the received effect control command is a normal state specification command (step 113IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the normal state (for example, a blue background image according to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 113IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state A designation command (step 113IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a setting sun) corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via a jackpot). Control to switch to the yellow background image according to the mode) is performed (step 113IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 113IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a time saving state via the time saving state) according to the time saving state B. Control to switch to the green background image according to the forest mode) is performed (step 113IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 113IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, a time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to the orange background image according to the tangerine field mode (step 113IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 113IWS633 to S638, even in the same time saving state, which of the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is performed. Display different background images depending on.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, the common background image is displayed regardless of whether the time saving state is via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured. For example, a common background image may be displayed in step 113IW634, step 113IWS636, and step 113IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured as.

If the received effect control command is a probability change state specification command (step 113IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the probability change state (for example, a red background image according to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 113IWS640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 113IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 113IW20 (step 113IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed or the relief time is shortened (see step 113IWS1126, S1134). At the start of the symbol determination period, the right-handed notification LED 113IW20 is turned on.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 113IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 113IW20 (step 113IWS644).

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo designation command (step 113IWS644A), the effect control CPU 120 starts a customer waiting timer for use in controlling the customer waiting demo effect (step 113IWS644B).

The customer waiting demo designation command is a command output from the main board 11 when there is no hold storage at the end of the symbol confirmation period or the end of the jackpot.

In addition, the customer waiting demo designation command is a command that is output even when the power is turned on (in both cases when the ram clear is performed and when the power is restored). When the set value is changed or confirmed when the power is turned on, for example, the transition to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed by the game machine administrator (for example, a game clerk) or the game machine administrator (for example) , The game clerk) shifts to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed, the setting value command is transmitted at the end of each mode, and then the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted. It should be noted that the transmission of the customer waiting demo designation command at the time of restoration of the power failure and at the end of the setting confirmation mode does not change the special symbol, the hold memory is not stored, and the big hit game state and the small hit game state. It may be performed when neither of the above is the case.

In the feature unit 113IW, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect can be executed as the customer waiting demo effect. The telop display effect is an effect of displaying a telop display area in the lower right and upper left areas of the image display device 5, and scrolling and displaying character information such as "relief time reduction mounted" in the telop display area. Further, the demo movie effect is an effect of reproducing and displaying a predetermined moving image (demo movie) on the entire surface of the image display device 5. In addition, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect may be overlapped, and in that case, the display of the telop display area is displayed on the front side of the demo movie.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 113IWS645). ). For example, when a command for designating a large prize opening is received, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that the large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS611.

(Customer waiting demo production control process)
FIG. 8-30 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo effect control process. The customer waiting demo effect control process is a process performed after step S161 in the effect control process process and before steps S170 to S177. That is, the customer waiting demo effect control process is a process performed every time the effect control process process is performed. In the customer waiting demo effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the telop display effect when 10 seconds have passed after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y, S251 of step 113IWS250). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of the telop display effect is determined by using the telop display execution lottery table according to the set value.

8-31 (A) and 8-31 (B) are explanatory views showing a telop display execution lottery table. In the telop display execution lottery table, judgment values corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of the telop display effect are assigned for each remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. , The percentage of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the telop display execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 8-31 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value “1” is set. FIG. 8-31 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value “6” is set. The illustration of the telop display execution lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display execution lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 8-31 (A) is used, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the telop display effect is executed 30%. It is decided at the ratio of 70% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 40% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 60% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 50% that the telop display effect is executed, and that the telop display effect is not executed at a rate of 50%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 55% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 45% that the telop display effect is not executed.

When the telop display execution lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 8-31 (B) is used, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, the telop display effect is executed 60%. It is decided at the ratio of 40% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 30% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 20% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 15% that the telop display effect is not executed.

As described above, the execution rate of the telop display effect is higher when the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less than when the remaining number of times until the relief time is 11 or more. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the number of fluctuations in the relief time to be reached, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the end of the game immediately before the number of fluctuations in the relief time is reached. can.

Further, as described above, the telop display effect is executed at a higher rate when the set value "6" is set than when the set value "1" is set. As a result, the player can predict the set value based on the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

In addition, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the higher the telop display effect is executed. As a result, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened based on the execution frequency of the telop display effect.

The remaining number of times until the relief time reduction can be specified by the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. That is, before the command for specifying the number of relief time 2 indicating that the relief time is reduced to 200 is received, a lottery is performed assuming that the remaining number of times until the relief time is 201 or more, and the relief time is reduced to 200 times. Relief time reduction number 2 indicating that there is a remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is received after the specified command is received and before the relief time reduction number 2 designation command indicating that the relief time is reduced to 100 times is received. Is 101 or more and 200 or less, and a lottery is performed. I do.

When it is decided to execute the telop display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a telop display mode determination lottery process for determining the effect mode of the telop display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the effect mode of the telop display effect is determined by using the telop display mode determination lottery table according to the set value.

8-31 (C) and 8-31 (D) are explanatory views showing a telop display mode determination lottery table. The telop display mode determination lottery table is assigned judgment values corresponding to the telop display effect effect mode (color of the frame of the telop display area, blue, red) for each remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. FIG. In the examples shown in −31 (C) and −31 (C) and (D), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the explanation. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for telop display mode determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 8-31 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set value “1” is set. FIG. 8-31 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set value “6” is set. The illustration of the telop display mode determination lottery table used when the set values "2" to "5" are set is omitted.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 8-31 (C) is used, the color of the frame of the telop display area is red when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more. Is determined at a rate of 40%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined at a rate of 60%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 30%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 20%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined at a rate of%.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 8-31 (D) is used, the color of the frame of the telop display area is red when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more. It is determined at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue at a rate of 30%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 20%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 90% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 10%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 95% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined at a rate of%.

In this way, the ratio of displaying the frame color of the telop display area in red is higher when the number of remaining times until the relief time is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the relief time is 11 or more. It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the number of fluctuations in the relief time to be reached.

Further, in this way, the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red at a higher rate when the set value "6" is set than when the set value "1" is set. It is configured. As a result, the player can predict the set value depending on the production mode of the telop display effect.

Further, in this way, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the higher the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red. Thereby, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened depending on the production mode of the telop display effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 starts a telop display effect that displays the telop display area of the determined mode (step 113IWS254).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie when 3 minutes have passed after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command (Y, S256 in step 113IWS255).

Regarding the telop display and demo movie display displayed here, the display ends based on the fact that the game ball passes through the start port, the next fluctuation is started, or the player's operation is detected. To do.

FIG. 8-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 8-32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 113IWS1011), and if not, the pre-reading notice is as it is. End the setting process.

The start winning command is a disorder for the game control microcomputer 100 to determine the display result (including the jackpot type) and the fluctuation pattern when there is a start winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. It is a command that extracts a numerical value and indicates a winning judgment result in which a display result or a fluctuation pattern is pre-read and judged based on the extracted random number value. The start winning command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when there is a start winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. Examples of the start winning command include a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start winning designation command, and a total hold storage number designation command.

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained and the judgment result of the type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) in which the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value among the determination results at the time of winning. The start winning prize designation command is an effect control command indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has a starting winning. The total hold storage number designation command is an effect control command for designating the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

In the present embodiment, based on the variation category command, the variation is revariated when the variation is accompanied by super reach, the variation is accompanied by normal reach, the variation is accompanied by pseudo-ream, or the variation is accompanied by pseudo-ream. It is possible to specify how many times the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-ream or is uncertain. The undetermined state is a case where the variation pattern corresponding to the random number for determining the variation pattern acquired at the time of the start winning is different depending on the number of reserved storages at the start of the variation corresponding to the start winning.

The start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order in which they are received in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area. Then, each command stored in the start winning command storage area is stored in the first storage area 1 each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (every time the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is received). The contents of the command storage area at the time of starting winning are shifted.

When a new start winning command is received in step 113IWS1011, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying a new hold display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead flag indicating that the look-ahead notice effect is being executed is set (step 113IWS1013), and if it is set, the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated as it is. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled in the time saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled in the time saving state, the process proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

When the time reduction state is not controlled, the number of reserved storages is compared with the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction (step 113IWS1015), and if the number of reserved storages is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, the value remains as it is. The reading notice setting process ends. When the number of reserved memories is a value equal to or less than the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less (step 113IWS1016). If the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated as it is. If the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is not 10 times or less, a look-ahead effect execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined using the look-ahead notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIGS. 8-33.

FIG. 8-33 is an explanatory diagram showing a look-ahead notice effect execution lottery table. In the look-ahead notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIGS. 8-33, whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed and the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect when executing the pre-reading notice effect for each winning judgment result (big hit, time reduction loss, time reduction no loss) (No. Judgment values for the first aspect and the second aspect) are assigned.

The look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect is an effect of counting down the number of fluctuations until the start of the change of the advance notice target of the look-ahead notice effect in red, and the look-ahead notice effect of the second aspect is a notice of the look-ahead notice effect. It is an effect that counts down the number of fluctuations until the start of the fluctuation of the target in blue.

For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is decided that the pre-reading notice effect of the first aspect is performed at a rate of 70%, and that the pre-reading notice effect is not performed at a rate of 30%. If the winning determination result is out of time, it is decided that the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect is performed at a rate of 40%, and that the pre-reading notice effect is not performed at a rate of 60%. If the winning judgment result is no time reduction, it is decided to perform the pre-reading notice effect of the first mode at a rate of 4%, and to perform the pre-reading notice effect of the second mode at a rate of 6%. It is decided not to perform the look-ahead notice effect at a rate of 90%.

As described above, since the pre-reading advance notice effect of the first aspect can be executed depending on the case where the jackpot is a big hit and the case where there is no time reduction, the pre-reading notice effect suggests that the jackpot is controlled. Further, since the pre-reading advance notice effect of the second aspect can be executed depending on the case where the time reduction is off and the case where there is no time reduction, it is a look-ahead advance notice effect suggesting that the time reduction is controlled.

When it is decided to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the look-ahead display area and the countdown display on the image display unit 5 (step 113IWS1019), and sets the look-ahead flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by performing the process of step 113IWS1015, when the number of reserved memories is larger than the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction, that is, in the reserved storage stored before reaching the fluctuation of the relief time reduction. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the hold memory corresponding to the fluctuation performed after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving is restricted (prohibited). As a result, it is possible to limit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect before and after the control of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect in the effect.

Further, by performing the process of step 113IWS1016, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted (prohibited). As a result, the countdown effect corresponding to the control of the relief time reduction and the look-ahead advance notice effect are not executed in duplicate.

For example, in a gaming machine capable of performing a countdown display for reaching the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 8-48 (A) and a countdown display as a look-ahead notice effect shown in FIG. 8-48 (B). , As shown in FIG. 8-48 (C), when the countdown display for reaching the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction and the countdown display as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed in duplicate, the effect becomes complicated. It is expected that it will become. In particular, when both the effect showing the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and the look-ahead notice effect are effects accompanied by a countdown display, it becomes difficult to know which countdown display should be focused on, so that the effect is reduced. It is possible that it will end up. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect by configuring the effect indicating the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and the pre-reading advance notice effect not to be executed in duplicate.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-34 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 113IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 113IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 113IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 113IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 113IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 113IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot A", the effect control CPU 120 has three decorative symbols with the same even-numbered symbols as stop symbols. (10R jackpot A symbol) is determined. When the received display result specification command indicates "10R jackpot B", the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols (10R jackpot B symbol). To determine.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of the decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including the special symbol (for example, the star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and rhombic symbols) may be determined according to the time saving type.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice effect setting process for setting a notice effect indicating the reliability of controlling the jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the advance notice effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed by using the advance notice effect execution lottery table (see FIGS. 8-35 (A) and (B)) according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. If it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect mode determination lottery table (see FIGS. 8-35 (C) and (D)) according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is used. , The effect mode of the advance notice effect to be executed is determined, and the execution of the advance notice effect of the determined effect mode is set. Although not shown, the process table including the advance notice set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806, and S807, which will be described later.

8-35 (A) and 8-35 (B) are explanatory views showing a notice effect execution lottery table. In the notice effect execution lottery table, judgment values corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect are assigned to each variable display result (big hit, miss), and examples shown in FIGS. 8-35 (A) and (B). In, for the sake of brevity, the percentage of the assigned determination values is shown. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the advance notice effect execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 8-35 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect execution lottery table used when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is greater than 10. FIG. 8-31 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect execution lottery table used when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

When the notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-35 (A) (remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened> 10) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, the advance notice effect is executed 70%. It is decided at a rate, and it is decided at a rate of 30% that the advance notice effect is not executed. If the variable display result is out of alignment, it is determined at a rate of 10% that the advance notice effect is executed, and at a rate of 90% that the advance notice effect is not executed.

When the notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-35 (B) (remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened ≤ 10) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, the advance notice effect is executed 70%. It is decided at a rate, and it is decided at a rate of 30% that the advance notice effect is not executed. If the variable display result is out of alignment, it is determined at a rate of 1% that the advance notice effect is executed, and at a rate of 99% that the advance notice effect is not executed.

In this way, the jackpot fluctuation is configured to be easier to execute the advance notice effect than the case where the jackpot fluctuation is an out-of-order fluctuation.

Further, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is 10 or less, the warning effect is given when the variable display result is out of alignment than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is greater than 10. The configuration is such that the rate of execution is low. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest during the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

8-35 (C) and 8-35 (D) are explanatory views showing a notice production mode determination lottery table. The lottery table for determining the mode of advance notice is assigned a judgment value corresponding to the mode of effect of the notice effect (color of the character to be displayed, blue, red) for each variable display result (big hit, missed). In the examples shown in 35 (C) and 35 (D), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the advance notice effect mode determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 8-35 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect mode determination lottery table used when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is greater than 10. FIG. 8-35 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect mode determination lottery table used when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

When the lottery table for determining the mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 8-31 (C) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, red is determined at a rate of 70% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. , Blue is determined at a rate of 30% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. If the variable display result is out of order, red is determined at a rate of 10% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect, and blue is determined at a rate of 90% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect.

When the lottery table for determining the mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 8-31 (D) is used, if the variable display result is a big hit, red is determined at a rate of 70% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. , Blue is determined at a rate of 30% as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect. If the variable display result is out of order, red is determined at a rate of 1% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect, and blue is determined at a rate of 99% as the color of the character displayed in the notice effect.

In this way, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character displayed in the advance notice effect than in the case where the jackpot fluctuation is an out-of-order fluctuation.

Further, in this way, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is 10 or less, the color of the character is different when the variable display result is out of alignment than when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is greater than 10. Red is easy to select as. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest during the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less.

Next, if the pre-reading flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the pre-reading advance notice effect (step 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times (step 113IWS803). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times is determined by, for example, a command for specifying the relief time reduction number 2. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it has been received.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 has the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including a fanning effect according to the number of fluctuations is selected (step 113IWS804). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 2 specified command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is set to "100". Select the process table that contains the corresponding fanning effect. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "07 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 700), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800 times". Select a process table that includes a fanning effect according to. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 times, the effect control CPU 120 is used until the relief time is shortened. It is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less (step 113IWS805). To check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be judged by doing.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. (Step 113IWS806). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 specified command is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10), the count number until the relief time is reduced " Select a process table that includes a countdown effect according to "10". Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 1), the count until the relief time is reduced is counted. Select a process table that includes a countdown effect according to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and the fanning effect or the countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the background specification command for specifying the background image is configured to be transmitted, the EXT data of the background specification command is configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmitted. You may. Then, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command and execute the fanning effect or the countdown effect.

Further, in this example, even if the number of fluctuations in the relief time is reached, if the jackpot fluctuation occurs, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual is used, but only in such a mode. Instead, the variation display may be executed using a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time.

Further, in this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the effect effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 5 is performed. For example, the smaller the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, the wider the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 is.

Further, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the gaming state. As a result, even when the time is controlled to the time saving state B, it is possible to execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect according to the remaining number of times, as in the case of being controlled to the normal state. However, it is possible to improve the interest by giving Hokuseki to shorten the relief time.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 10 or less (N in step 113IWS805), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS809). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 113IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 113IWS810).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 113IWS811).

(Variable display during production processing)
8-36 and 8-37 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 113IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 113IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time saving state (time saving mode)) and right-handed. The process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 113IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the time reduction may be delayed or the relief time may be shortened during the normal state. However, in step 113IWS847, when the time reduction is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time reduction deviation and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time is shortened. Select the process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. Whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as the relief time is shortened is determined by, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command being "00 ( It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is "H)".

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 113IWS856). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 113IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received (Y in step 113IWS856), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 113IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 113IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 113IWS860). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the process shifts to the processing after step 113IWS858 and shifts to the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 113IWS857 and the process does not shift to the processing after step 113IWS858.

In step 113IWS861A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a target variation of the look-ahead advance notice effect (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of reserved memories when the look-ahead notice effect is started is set as the number of executions K of the look-ahead notice effect, the number of executions K is subtracted by 1 at the start of the change, and the change in which the subtraction result becomes 0 is the look-ahead notice. It can be determined that the target variation of the production. If the target change of the look-ahead notice effect, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B), and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead notice effect is started, the look-ahead flag is reset when the fluctuation of the notice target fluctuation of the look-ahead notice effect is stopped, and the hold memory generated during the set of the look-ahead flag is targeted. The pre-reading notice effect is not performed so that a plurality of pre-reading notice effects are not executed in duplicate. It should be noted that a plurality of pre-reading notice effects may be duplicated and executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 113IWS871), and confirms whether or not the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 113IWS871). Step 113 IWS872). If the value of the final effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 113IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to n) (step 113IWS874).

Further, when the process timer times out (step 113IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 113IWS876). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 113IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being confirmed and displayed (step 113IWS878). Stopping the decorative symbol If the symbol is being confirmed and displayed, the process ends as it is. If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol (no time reduction), time saving deviation symbol, jackpot symbol) (step 113IWS879). ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 113IWS879 (Y in step 113IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 113IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step). 113IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 113IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 113IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 113IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the big hit medium effect including the mode transition effect (the effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state (probability change mode) or the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and the right-handed notification. (Step 113IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 113IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 113IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 113IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, when the missed symbol (no time reduction) or the missed symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variable display start wait process. The value is updated according to (step S170) (step 113IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 8-39 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variable display that shortens the relief time is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-39, in the variation display (see steps 113IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is ended. When the missed symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the missing symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds (see step 113IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIGS. 8-39, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 113IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the symbol determination period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 8-39 (see step 113IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 8-39, the background image (this example) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 113IWS638).

(Time saving promotion control timing)
Next, the control when shifting from the time saving state (time saving state B) via the time saving deviation to the time saving state (time saving state C) via the relief time saving will be described. FIG. 8-40 is a timing chart for explaining the control timing when shifting from the time saving state B to the time saving state C. As shown in the figure, at the timing T0 when the 10R jackpot A is reached, 800 is set in the relief time reduction counter, 100 is set in the time reduction counter (see step 113IWS539), and the time reduction flag A is set to reduce the time. It is controlled by the state (see step 113IWS537). Then, the value of the relief time reduction counter and the value of the time reduction counter are subtracted by 1 for each fluctuation. When the fluctuation is performed 100 times, the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, and the time reduction state A is controlled to the normal state.

After that, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing T1 where the value of the relief time saving counter is 50, 100 is set in the time saving counter (see step 113IWS164), and the time saving flag B is set to enter the time saving state. It is controlled (see step 113IWS166).

Then, since the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the timing T2 in which the fluctuation is further performed 50 times, the time reduction flag B is reset and the time reduction flag C is set, so that the time reduction state via the time reduction deviation is started. It is promoted to the time saving state via the relief time saving (see steps 113IWS171A and S171B). Then, 800 is set in the time reduction counter (see step 113IWS172).

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. 8-41 to 8-45 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the state shifts to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 8-41 to FIG. 8-45, the effect screens are changed in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

FIGS. 8-41 to 8-44 show specific examples of the effect mode when the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C. FIG. 8-45 shows a specific example of the effect mode when the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C.

As shown in FIG. 8-41 (A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol is stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, it is assumed that the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 are stopped and the detached symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "134") is derived and displayed when the remaining 700 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. At this time, the remaining number of rotations display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, saying "Relief time is shortened with 700 rotations left!". At this time, the explanation of the effect of shortening the relief time is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (B), for example, when the remaining 600 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and come off (in this example, "423"). (Combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 8-41 (A), the remaining rotation number display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left, which says "Relief time reduction starts with 600 rotations left!". At this time, the explanation of the effect of shortening the relief time is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 113IW103.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and 8-41 (B), a case is shown in which a fanning effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 400 to 700 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (hence, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times), the fanning effect is performed. It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 is received, a lottery process based on a random number is performed and it is decided to execute the fanning effect. It may be configured to perform the fanning effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the fanning effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (C) to 8-42 (E), the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed after 10 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction. Is displayed, and the countdown display 113IW104 according to the remaining rotation speed is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, in the countdown display 113IW104, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed every time the fluctuation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops. It should be noted that each figure shows an example in which out-of-order symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols of "653", "844", "278", and "216") are derived and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (C) to 8-42 (E), after 10 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the effect image of the display range corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is displayed. In addition to the displayed effect effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-42 (F) to 8-42 (H), when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is 0 is 0, the time reduction rush effect is performed. The symbol is stopped and the out-of-order symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "254") is stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol may not be displayed, and the out-of-order symbol may be displayed only in the small symbol. Note that FIGS. 8-42 (G) and (H) show a state in which the out-of-order symbols as small symbols are temporarily stopped, and the special symbols continue to fluctuate. In FIGS. 8-43 (I) to 8-44 (M), it is a period in which the out-of-order symbols as small symbols are confirmed and displayed, and the fluctuation of the special symbols is also stopped.

Further, in FIG. 8-42 (G), the control to the time saving state C is notified by displaying the character string indicating that the time saving state is controlled to 800 times on the image display device 5. Then, in FIG. 8-42 (H), a right-handed stroke promotion image for promoting right-handed strike is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the case of controlling from the normal state to the time saving state C is shown here, the right-handed promotion image is displayed, but when controlling from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C, right-handed hitting has already been performed. Since this is done, the display of the right-handed notification image is restricted when the symbol is stopped (see FIG. 8-45 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (I), when the symbol determination period is entered, the mode effect start display 113IW105 “extreme heat!” Is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. After that, in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, the operation suggestion image 113IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-1) is operated (pressed) is displayed. NS. For example, in the operation suggestion image 113IW106, the characters "press" are displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 113IW106, "V" The character display 113IW107 of "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction starts. In addition, a right-handed instruction display 113IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 8-43 (K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process of whether or not a big hit is obtained and a variation pattern type look-ahead determination process in the start winning prize determination process (step S101). Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 8-43 (K) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, there is a high ratio that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 8-6 (E)). ), Therefore, the variable display is extremely quickly digested, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-43 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-43 (K) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

When the fluctuation that reaches the relief time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is secured, and the same effect as in FIG. 31 is executed to once perform an effect that shortens the relief time. After that, the effect of notifying the big hit may be executed.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 113IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. No. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 8-42 (H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (L), the mode selection screen 113IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When a predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 113IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "Relief time reduction rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the remaining number of rotations until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time is explained, and the countdown is displayed, but it may be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol or during the fluctuation.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed in a variable display in which the relief time is shortened, but the symbol confirmation period is normally 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear processing is executed or when the jackpot is hit is shown. When it is configured to execute a story (such as a story), it may be configured to clear the selection buffer and story counter of the story. In addition, a story may be configured to be settable when the relief time is activated, or a different story may be configured to be settable according to the game state.

As described above, FIGS. 8-41 to 8-44 show the case where the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C, but FIG. 8-45 shows the case where the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C. A specific example of the production mode will be shown. For example, FIGS. 8-45 (A) and (B) showing an example of displaying the timing of 10 rotations remaining and 1 rotation remaining until the shift to the relief time reduction in the time saving state B show the remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction in the normal state. In addition to the display of FIGS. 8-41 (C) and 8-42 (E) showing an example of displaying the timing of 10 rotations and 1 rotation remaining, a right-handed notification effect (right-pointing arrow) due to the time saving state. Image display) is being performed. This right-handed notification effect is continuously performed while the time is controlled to be shortened. The value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 8-45 (A) is 60, and the value of the time saving state counter in FIG. 8-45 (B) is 51. That is, FIG. 8-45 (A) is a display example of the fluctuation 10 times before the timing T1 in FIG. 8-40, and FIG. 8-45 (B) is one time before the timing T1 in FIG. 8-40. It is a display example in the fluctuation of.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (C) and 8-45 (D), the time reduction promotion effect is performed when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D), a character string indicating promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike FIG. 8-42 (H), the right-handed notification image is not displayed again because the time is already controlled to be shortened.

The countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced to 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player is expected to enter the relief time reduction by performing the countdown effect and the effect effect (by performing the so-called ghost effect) from a timing other than the case where the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times. You may let it. In that case, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (A), the fluctuation in which the value of the time reduction counter is 50 is terminated, the next fluctuation is started, and the countdown display and the effect display are started (FIG. 8-46 (B)), countdown display and effect display are performed over multiple fluctuations (see FIG. 8-46 (C)), and predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, countdown display and effect display are started. The countdown display and the effect display may be terminated at the third variation) (see FIG. 8-46 (D)). The effect is not limited to the one performed at the timing when the value of the time reduction counter is 50, and the effect may be performed when the value of the time reduction counter is 100 or 200.

Further, the execution rate of the Gase effect may be different depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. For example, the occurrence rate may be higher as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shorter. As a result, the player can realize that the relief time is approaching, and the interest can be improved. Further, this Gase effect may not be performed when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern accompanied by SP reach) is selected.

FIG. 8-47 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example when the normal state is controlled to the time saving state B. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-47 (A), variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols is performed in a normal state. Next, as shown in FIG. 8-47 (B), the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, as a decorative symbol corresponding to the time-saving missed symbol, the symbol described as "chance mode entry", which is not normally displayed, is stopped and displayed, and as a small symbol corresponding to the time-saving missed symbol, it is not normally displayed. The combination "135" symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-47 (C), when the stop of the time saving symbol is completed, a character string such as "100 times remaining" is displayed as the first change in the time saving state, so that the time saving pattern is changed 100 times. It is notified that the time is controlled until it is reported.

Here, a display example is shown when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal state. However, as described above, the time-saving out-of-time symbol is not stopped and displayed in the time-saving state and the probabilistic change state. In the state, the display shown in FIG. 8-47 is not performed.

FIG. 8-49 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the customer waiting demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 8-49 (A), the fluctuation is stopped in a state where the hold storage is not stored, and at this time, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted from the main board 11. Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-49 (B) and (D), the telop display effect is performed 10 seconds after the demo designation command is received. The example shown in FIG. 8-49 (B) shows a display example of the telop display effect in which the color of the frame of the telop display area is blue, and it is suggested to the player that the period until the relief time is shortened is relatively long. NS. Further, the example shown in FIG. 8-49 (D) shows a display example of the telop display effect in which the color of the frame of the telop display area is red, and the player is informed that the period until the relief time is shortened is relatively short. It is suggested. Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-49 (C) and 8-49 (E), the telop display effect is performed 3 minutes after the demo designation command is received.

When the demo movie production is being performed, at least one of the operation or contact with the hitting ball operation handle 30 and the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected. In some cases, it may be possible to execute the dialogue effect by voice output, and it may be possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the mode of the dialogue production (for example, the content of the dialogue, the pitch of the sound, etc.). good.

Specifically, a sensor capable of detecting the player's operation or contact with the ball striking operation handle 30 is provided, and when the detection signal by the sensor is input to the main board 11, the player operates the main board 11. When a command indicating that (the player has operated or touched the ball striking operation handle 30) is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, or When the hold storage number addition designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not to execute the dialogue effect based on the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. Then, when it is decided to execute, the mode of the dialogue effect may be determined based on the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, and the dialogue effect of the determined mode may be executed. As a result, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

Further, in this example, although the description has been made using a type of gaming machine that can be controlled in a time-saving state until the next big hit, it may be applied to other types of gaming machines. For example, a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) in which the probability change state (including the time saving state) ends when a predetermined number of changes are performed, or a lottery (so-called fall) for each change in the probability change state (including the time saving state). It is possible to control a gaming machine of a type that performs a lottery) and ends the probability change state according to the lottery result, or a small hit game state different from the big hit game state, and the game ball passes through a predetermined area in the small hit game state. It may be applied to a type of gaming machine (so-called two-type gaming machine) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the above.

In a gaming machine of the type in which a fall lottery is performed, the advantage after the fall differs depending on the timing at which the probabilistic state falls during the period until the relief time is shortened. For example, when a probabilistic jackpot occurs, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is controlled is 800, and a fall lottery is performed for each fluctuation in the probabilistic state. Then, since the number of remaining fluctuations from the end of the probabilistic state to the occurrence of the relief time reduction differs between the case where the probabilistic state ends at the 100th fluctuation and the case where the probabilistic state ends at the 500th fluctuation, after the fall. Will have different advantages. In that case, different effects may be performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. For example, the effect content in the fluctuation at the end of the probabilistic state is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or the background image after the probabilistic state is finished and controlled to the normal state is displayed by the relief time. It may be different depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until it occurs. If the fall is decided by the fall lottery immediately after the relief time is shortened, it can be said that the situation is the most disadvantageous because the period until the next relief time is shortened is the longest.

Further, it is conceivable that the effect control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. For example, it is conceivable that the command (command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery and the command for specifying the initialization) sent when the power is turned on cannot be received normally due to missing commands or garbled command data. In that case, since the effect control CPU 120 cannot specify the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, telop display effect, countdown effect, effect effect) suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is restricted (for example). It may be prohibited). It should be noted that the restriction may be lifted based on the next occurrence of a big hit or a time saving loss. In addition, even during the period when the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted, when another command (for example, background specification command, variation pattern specification command) is received, the effect according to the received command is executed. There may be. Alternatively, if the command transmitted when the power is turned on cannot be received normally, the suggestion effect may be executed as if the ram was cleared (assuming that the value of the relief time reduction counter was initialized).

In addition, even when the effect control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the command indicating the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction (relief time reduction number 1 designation command, relief time reduction number 2 designation command), the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is suggested. The execution of the suggestion effect (for example, telop display effect, countdown effect, effect effect) may be restricted (prohibited). Alternatively, it may be possible to execute the suggestion effect in a mode or a selection ratio that suggests that the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is large.

(Modification example 1)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 113IW, the setting value is suggested by the telop display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the telop display effect is an effect that does not suggest the set value and is different from the telop display effect. It may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value as an effect. Hereinafter, a modification 1 capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value as an effect different from the telop display effect will be described.

In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect as a notice effect during fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-51 (A) to perform a setting suggestion effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect.

As shown in the figure, when the setting value "1" is set, it is decided not to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. When the set value "2" is set, it is decided not to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 89%, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 11%. When the set value "3" is set, it is decided not to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88%, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 12%. When the set value "4" is set, it is decided not to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 87%, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 13%. When the set value "5" is set, it is decided not to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 14%. When the set value "6" is set, it is decided not to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 85%, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 15%.

In the first modification, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the setting suggestion effect, it determines the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect and sets the setting suggestion effect of the determined effect mode. The effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, the setting suggestion effect mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 8-51 (B) to perform a setting suggestion effect mode determination lottery for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. As the setting suggestion effect mode, for example, a first mode and a second mode in which the displayed characters are different are provided.

As shown in the figure, when the set value "1" is set, the first mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 40%, and the second mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 60%. Determine the aspect. When the set value "2" is set, the first mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 44%, and the second mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 56%. When the set value "3" is set, the first aspect is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 48%, and the second aspect is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 52%. When the set value "4" is set, the first aspect is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 52%, and the second aspect is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 48%. When the set value "5" is set, the first mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 56%, and the second mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 44%. When the set value "6" is set, the first mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 60%, and the second mode is determined as the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect at a rate of 40%.

Further, in the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the telop display effect is executed by using the telop display execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-51 (C) in the telop display execution lottery process (step 113IWS251). do.

As shown in the figure, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, it is determined at a rate of 30% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 70% that the telop display effect is not executed. NS. When the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is determined at a rate of 40% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 60% that the telop display effect is not executed. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is determined at a rate of 50% that the telop display effect is executed, and that the telop display effect is not executed at a rate of 50%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 55% that the telop display effect is executed, and at a rate of 45% that the telop display effect is not executed.

Further, in the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the telop display by using the telop display mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 8-51 (D) in the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 113IWS253). do.

As shown in the figure, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 201 or more, it is determined at a rate of 40% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is blue. Display is determined at a rate of 60%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less, it is decided at a rate of 70% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 30%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 11 or more and 100 or less, it is decided at a rate of 80% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Is determined at a rate of 20%. When the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, it is determined at a rate of 85% that the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in red, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is displayed in blue. Determined at a rate of%.

In this example, a predetermined value (for example, 800) is set in the relief time reduction counter only when the jackpot fluctuation is stopped (see step 113IWS135) and when the RAM is cleared (see step 113IWS12). is not it. For example, a predetermined value may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the timing controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. In that case, if the same value (for example, 800) as the value set in the time reduction counter (for example, 800) is set as a predetermined value, 800 times without a big hit after controlling the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. When the change is made, the time saving state ends and the relief time is shortened, so that the time saving state is controlled again via the relief time saving. Therefore, it can be configured so that the time saving state C is substantially continued until the next big hit. Further, if a value (for example, 1000) larger than the value (for example, 1000) set in the time reduction counter is set as a predetermined value, 800 without a big hit after controlling the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. When the number of fluctuations is made, the time saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state, and when 200 times of fluctuations are made, the time saving state is controlled again via the relief time saving.

Further, the configuration may be such that the time saving state A can be controlled 800 times based on the big hit. For example, if 800 is set in the time reduction counter when a big hit occurs and 800 is also set in the relief time reduction counter as described above, the big hit is made after controlling to the time reduction state A. When the fluctuation is performed 800 times without occurring, the time saving state ends and the relief time is shortened, so that the time saving state is controlled again via the relief time saving. Therefore, it can be configured so that the time saving state A is substantially continued until the next big hit.

Further, it may be possible to control the time saving state A which is substantially continued until the next big hit, and the time saving state C which is substantially continued until the next big hit. The production content in the time saving state A and the production content in the time saving state C may be common. For example, a configuration may be configured in which a common fluctuation pattern is selected between the time saving state A and the time saving state C. Further, it is also possible that the suggestion effect (for example, the fanning effect, the countdown effect, the effect effect, and the telop display effect) that suggests the value of the relief time reduction counter can be executed in common in the time reduction state A and the time reduction state C. good.

Further, in this example, it is determined that the gaming machine is a type of gaming machine that waits for the change of the other special symbol while the one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed. It is not limited to. For example, it may be a type of gaming machine capable of executing the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol in parallel at the same time. In that case, if the relief time is shortened based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol while the time reduction deviation of the first special symbol is being performed, it is the case that the time reduction deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. However, it may be controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving instead of the time saving state via the time saving loss.

Further, in the feature unit 113IW and each modification shown above, in controlling the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probabilistic control is performed until the next jackpot occurs (or until the probabilistic fall occurs). The case where it is applied to is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in controlling the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, the so-called ST in which the upper limit number of times of the special figure game in which the probability change control is performed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol) is set is set. A configuration for controlling the feature unit 113IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied to the machine.

Specifically, as a so-called ST machine, the jackpot probability is about 1/100, the probability variation state is controlled at a rate of 100% after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the maximum number of special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed (for example). , 8 times) will be described in a case where the configuration for controlling the feature unit 113IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification is applied to the gaming machine. In the gaming machine of the ST machine, a plurality of types of jackpots (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, etc.) are provided as display results of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol. When a big hit occurs, it is assumed that the big hit (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) has the highest degree of advantage at a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%). In addition, when the jackpot has the highest degree of advantage, it is controlled to the probability change state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the probability change control is performed 8 times as the upper limit of the special figure game. Suppose that is set. Then, if a big hit does not occur in the eight special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed, the maximum number of times in the special figure game in which the time is reduced (low probability / high base state) and the high base control is performed is set. It is assumed that 249 times are set. That is, after the end of the big hit game state, if the next big hit does not occur, it is controlled to the probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes, and then the time reduction state (low probability) with 249 time reductions. / High base state) shall be controlled.

Even if the game machine of the above ST machine finishes the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 250 times) in a non-probability state (low probability state) after the power is turned on to the game machine or a big hit occurs, the next big hit will be given. If it does not occur, it is possible to apply a configuration controlled to a time saving state (low probability / high base state) assuming that the relief time saving is established.

When such a configuration is applied, when the jackpot has the highest degree of advantage, it is first controlled to the probability variation state (high probability / high base state) with the probability variation number of 8 times after the end of the jackpot gaming state. At this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a big hit. Then, since it is in the probability change state (high probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated.

When the probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes is completed without a big hit, the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 249 time reductions is controlled. At this time, since it is a non-probability change state (low probability state), the value of the relief time reduction counter is set every time the special figure game (that is, the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol) is executed. Updated (eg, subtracted by 1).

When the time saving state (low probability / high base state) of 249 times of time saving is completed without the big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (low probability / low base state). However, at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special symbol game (variation display of the first special symbol or variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled. It will be. Here, if there is a hold memory stored in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) of 249 times of time reduction, a special symbol game (variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) based on the hold memory. By executing (variation display), the relief time reduction is established and the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) is controlled. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the transition to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to improve the interest.

When the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) ends and the relief time reduction is once controlled to the low base state (normal state), the background image corresponding to the high base state is continuously displayed. You may try to do it. In this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storages stored at the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time saving is established. If it is determined that the image is large, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Hereinafter, after the end of the time saving state of 249 times of time saving, the normal state controlled before the relief time saving is established (that is, the reserved memory stored in the time saving state after being controlled once after the time saving state is digested. The normal state) in which the relief time is shortened within the period until it is completed) is also called a special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

Further, for example, when the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) ends and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) is controlled by the relief time saving. Alternatively, a mode transition effect indicating that the control of the time saving state (low probability / high base state) by the relief time saving is started may be executed. In this case, after the end of the time saving state (low probability / high base state), the fluctuation display in the low base state (normal state) before the occurrence of the relief time reduction (for example, the fluctuation display immediately after the end of the time reduction state, or the relief time reduction The mode transition effect may be executed in the variable display immediately before the establishment of the above, or the mode transition effect may be executed in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened.

Further, for example, in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, when a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (for example, a 5R probability variation jackpot) is obtained among a plurality of types of jackpots, the next jackpot is awarded after the jackpot gaming state ends. If it does not occur, it is controlled to a probability change state (high probability / high base state) with 8 probability changes, and then to a time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 32 time reductions. That is, in the case of a big hit with a low degree of advantage, even if the time saving state (low probability / high base state) after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) ends, a short period (for example, in the time saving state) It is assumed that the relief time reduction is not established within the period (the period until the stored reserved memory is digested).

In this case, when the number of time reductions controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is 32 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time). Is to execute left-handed notification (for example, display of left-handed instruction display instructing left-handed in the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability / low base state) after the end of the final fluctuation in the time saving state. Then, when the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), the left-handed notification may not be executed after the end of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state. That is, the left-handed notification may not be executed at the time of transition to the special normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player has once transitioned to the low base state (normal state) when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time after the end of the time reduction state. You can improve your interest.

In addition, when the number of time reductions controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) (low probability / high base state) is 32 (that is, when the relief time reduction is not established within a short period of time). And when the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established in a short period of time), for example, a background specification command, a jackpot start designation command, a jackpot end designation command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 side, etc. By different types of effect control commands, the effect control board 12 distinguishes between those time saving states, and the effect control matching each time saving state (for example, displaying the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc.) , BGM output, etc.). The method of distinguishing the time saving state on the effect control board 12 side is not limited to such a method, and for example, the jackpot type and the number of time saving after the jackpot game may be specified by the received display result designation command.

When the number of time reductions is 249 times (that is, when the relief time reduction is established within a short period of time), a left-handed notification (for example, an image display device) is sent on the effect control board 12 side after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed. Even if the configuration is such that the left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed is not executed in No. 5, the main board 11 side has once shifted to the normal state (that is, left-handed from the right-handed state). The process corresponding to (switched to the state to be performed) (for example, turning off the right-handed display 26, stopping the output of the right-handed test signal output as a test signal, changing the firing position designation signal, etc.) is executed. During the transition to the normal state (that is, the special normal state), the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, 2 jackpot signals) may be temporarily stopped on the main board 11 side. , The external output may be continued. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, 2 jackpot signals), the output of the launch position designation signal output as the test signal is changed (or the output of the right-handed test signal is stopped). ) May be done.

Further, for example, the effect to be executed may be different between the time saving state (or the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 249 times) and the normal state (or the normal state other than the special normal state). For example, an effect that suggests that the relief time reduction is established or the number of times until the relief time is established (for example, a countdown effect) can be executed in the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state), while the remaining time is shortened. It may not be executed in the time saving state where the number of times is indicated (or the time saving state where the number of times of time saving is 249 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the above effects can be obtained is not limited to the configuration of the number of time reductions in the time reduction state controlled after the probability variation state used in the above description and the configuration of the number of fluctuations (non-probability variation state) in which the relief time reduction is established. .. For example, the number of fluctuations in which the relief time reduction is established (non-probability change state) is larger than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the start winning opening (for example, the second start) that makes it easier to enter in the time reduction state. It may be configured to be smaller than (or the same as) the sum of the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry into the winning opening). With such a configuration, even if the player shifts to the low base state (normal state) through the probability change state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) after the end of the big hit game state. , Since the relief time reduction is established without generating a new start prize in the low base state (normal state), the player is not made aware that the player has transitioned to the low base state (normal state) before the relief time reduction is established. It can be done and the interest can be improved.

Further, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability change state) in which the relief time reduction is established is smaller (or the same) than the time reduction number in the time reduction state, the time reduction is controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state). The relief time reduction can be established before the state (low probability / high base state) ends (that is, the number of time reductions can be updated by the establishment of the relief time reduction).

In the above-mentioned ST machine, the probability changes after the end of the big hit game state between when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. It seems that the number of time reductions in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled through the state (high probability / high base state) is different (or the ratio of the advantageous time reduction number among multiple types of time reduction times is different). It may be configured as. In this case, for example, when a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled through a probability change state (high probability / high base state) after the end of the big hit game state. ) Is 32 times (or 32 times out of 249 times is high), and when a big hit occurs due to the variation display of the second special symbol, after the end of the big hit game state , The number of time reductions in the time reduction state (low probability / high base state) controlled through the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is 249 times (or the number of time reductions is 32 times, 249 times out of 249 times. The ratio is high).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs (or the number of rounds of a plurality of types) when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that the ratio of the number of advantageous rounds is different). For example, when a big hit occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is 5 rounds (or 5 rounds, and the ratio of 5 rounds out of 10 rounds is high), and the 2nd special symbol When a big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of, the number of rounds in the big hit game state may be 10 rounds (or 5 rounds, and the ratio of 10 rounds out of 10 rounds is high) may be set. With such a configuration, the advantage can be different between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, which improves the interest. Can be made to.

Further, also in the above-mentioned ST machine gaming machine, the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability / high base state) and the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving are also performed. ) And, different variation pattern tables may be used. For example, in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) due to the relief time saving, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the time saving state (low probability / high base state) controlled after the probability variation state (high probability / high base state). A variation pattern table may be used in which the rate of determination of the variation pattern is high (and, for example, the rate of reach (or reach with particularly high expectation) is executed at the time of deviation is low). .. With such a configuration, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed. In addition, for example, when the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the rate of deviation is low in reach (or reach with particularly high expectation), so that the decline in interest is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the feature unit 113IW and the gaming machine of each modified example shown above, for example, as a jackpot type, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state (high probability / high base state) is continued until the next jackpot occurs. Probability variation jackpot, non-probability variation jackpot A controlled by time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 100 time reduction times, and non-probability variation jackpot A controlled by time reduction state (low probability / high base state) with 249 time reduction times. Probability change jackpot B is provided, and if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 fluctuation displays are completed in the non-probability change state after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the jackpot occurs, the relief time is shortened. It may be configured to do so. That is, the time reduction state is controlled until just before the relief time reduction is established (specifically, the number of time reductions in the time reduction state and the start winning opening (for example, the second start winning opening) that is easy to enter in the time reduction state). A jackpot type may be provided in which the sum with the upper limit memory number (for example, 4) of the special figure game based on the entry is larger (or the same) than the number of fluctuations (non-probability change state) in which the relief time reduction is established. With such a configuration, the transition of the game state is performed so as to shift from the time saving state after the big hit game to the time saving state due to the relief time saving (actually, it is temporarily controlled to the normal state before the relief time saving is established). It becomes possible to improve the interest.

In addition, when the first big hit occurs after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving, general such as warning notification of forgetting to take the prepaid card and warning notification of immersive prevention during the ending period of the big hit game state. The notification performed during the ending period of the first hit (the first big hit in the normal state) may be performed, or the logo of the gaming machine maker may be displayed. In this case, when the notification is made during the ending period of the first big hit after being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving, the notification may be performed in the same manner as the notification during the ending period of the first hit, or it may be simplified. The notification may be made in a modified manner.

As described above, the feature unit 113IW includes the inventions shown below.

Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of fluctuations of a symbol is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit. Some were controlled to a probabilistic state based on (that is, based on a special number of fluctuations (eg, 1000) without a jackpot). Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the symbol variation is frequently executed) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in the effect control in the gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number of times. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 113-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
Based on the fact that the starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied, and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor the variable) is satisfied. Variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
When the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display as the hold information,
Determining means that can determine to control to an advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes step 113IWS63 in the game control microcomputer 100).
Prior to the determination by the determination means, a determination means capable of determining that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
A specific suggestion effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect. A specific example of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to the countdown display, but a special decorative pattern) suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state based on the determination result by the determination means. (Chance eye) may be a stop display effect, a hold change effect that changes the color or shape of the hold display, a zone effect that displays a special background, etc.) (For example, the part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU 120)
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than a normal state (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that is controlled to the time saving state A by performing step 113IWS537). A part that is controlled to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166, and a part that is controlled to the time saving state C by performing step 113IWS171B).
It is provided with an updating means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing step 113IWS71) capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). (Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. By doing so, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 113IWS74, S75, S171B).
A special suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps 113IWS804, S806, S254 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestion effect (for example, a fanning effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display effect) related to the establishment of the special condition. With more parts to execute)
The means of executing the specific suggestion effect is
Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to restrict the execution of the specific suggestion effect for which the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is the target of advance notice (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 113IWS1015, the effect control CPU 120 prohibits the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect of the first aspect straddling before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time by not executing 113IWS1019).
A predetermined period from a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the update means is less than the special number of times to reach a specific value. (For example, in the case of Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120, by not executing step 113IWS1019, the pre-reading notice of the first aspect in the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction is restricted. A gaming machine characterized by (prohibiting the execution of production).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and to suppress the deterioration of the interest while avoiding the occurrence of defects in the production.

In this example, when the time saving state is already controlled, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving is not prohibited (if it is Y in step 113IWS1014, step 113IWS1015 is not performed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the time saving state is controlled, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect straddling before and after the start of the control to the relief time saving may be prohibited.

Further, in this example, the special suggestion effect is executed in the predetermined period from the predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined number of times when the numerical information updated by the updating means reaches the specific value, and the specific suggestion is performed in the predetermined period. It was decided to limit the execution of the production. Specifically, it was decided to start the execution of the countdown effect and prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect from the timing when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10. As a result, the special suggestion effect and the specific suggestion effect are not performed in duplicate, so that the effect can be suppressed from becoming complicated and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, it is decided to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects, execution of some of the pre-reading notice effects among the plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects is prohibited when straddling before and after the start of control to reduce the relief time. On the other hand, other pre-reading notice effects may not be prohibited (executable) even when they straddle before and after the start of control to shorten the relief time.

Similarly, in this example, it is decided to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects, some of the pre-reading notice effects among the plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects are prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction. The other look-ahead notice effects may not be prohibited (executable) in the fluctuation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction.

(Means 113-2) In the means 113-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166).
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 8-5 (A)).
When the special condition is satisfied and the special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can be controlled to a special state having an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time). By prioritizing the control to the time saving state via the relief time saving (steps 113IWS170 to S174) over the control to the time saving state via the relief (step 113IWS153 to S168), the fluctuation (relief time saving number counter) that shortens the relief time. When the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in (variation that becomes = 0), it is controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving),
Special suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special suggestion effect (for example, pre-reading advance notice effect of the second aspect) suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed based on the determination result by the determination means. (Part of executing step 113IWS1019) in
The special suggestion effect executing means is a specific value from a predetermined value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a predetermined number of times (for example, 790 times) that the numerical information updated by the update means is less than the special number of times. In the predetermined period until reaching, the execution of the special suggestion effect is restricted (for example, in the case of Y in step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120, by not executing 113IWS1019, in the variation immediately before being controlled to the relief time reduction. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect may be prohibited).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the production from becoming complicated, suppress the deterioration of the interest, and increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 113-3) In the means 113-1 or the means 113-2, the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less) is the predetermined period. The execution rate of the special suggestion effect may be higher than that of the earlier period (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 11 times or more) (see FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)). ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by expecting the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player due to the end of the game immediately before the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 113-4) In any one of means 113-1 to 113-3, the special suggestion effect executing means has a plurality of effect modes depending on the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened). The ratio of executing the special suggestion effect may differ depending on which of them (see FIGS. 8-31 (C) and (D)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to establish the special condition and to improve the interest.

In addition to the telop display effect, if the configuration is such that whether or not to execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect, which indicate the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, is determined by lottery, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is determined. The execution rate may be different.

(Means 113-5) In any one of means 113-1 to 113-4, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (FIG. 8-41 (A), (See (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

As for the explanatory effect, the execution rate and the selection rate of the effect mode may be different depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. For example, the explanation effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened. In addition, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the effect of the countdown effect and the effect effect suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is reduced by lowering the execution ratio of the explanation effect. It may be suppressed.

(Means 113-6) In any one of means 113-1 to 113-5, the special suggestion effect executing means is the first, which makes it easy to specify the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied as the special suggestion effect. The special suggestion effect (for example, fanning effect, countdown effect) and the second special suggestion effect (for example, effect effect, telop) in which it is more difficult to specify the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied than the first special suggestion effect. (Display effect) and can be executed (see FIGS. 8-41 (C) to 8-42 (E)).

According to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be improved.

(Means 113-7) In any of means 113-1 to 113-6, when the variable display is not executed and the hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) Is provided with a predetermined image display means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 113IWS256) capable of displaying the above.
The special suggestion effect execution means can execute the special suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) when the predetermined image is displayed (for example, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect can be executed in duplicate). The execution order of the display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect may be first or at the same time), depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. , The ratio of executing the special suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed may be different (see FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the special suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied, the selection ratio of the effect mode of the special suggestion effect is changed when the predetermined image is displayed (FIGS. 8-31 (C), (D). )). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the special suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of times the symbol fluctuates is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without causing a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on performing a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit), there was something controlled to a probabilistic state. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the symbol variation is frequently executed) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number, the interest when the special condition of the variable display number is satisfied is insufficient. Met. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 114-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
A state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that is controlled to the time saving state A by performing step 113IWS537). A part that is controlled to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166, and a part that is controlled to the time saving state C by performing step 113IWS171B).
It is provided with an updating means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing step 113IWS71) capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). (Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the execution number of the variable display, so that the special condition is set. When it is established, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 113IWS74, S75, S171B).
When a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, it can be controlled to the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs step 113IWS166. Control to time saving state B),
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 8-5 (A)).
The state control means determines the advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied when the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 reaches the variation of the relief time reduction when the time reduction state is controlled via the time reduction deviation by performing steps 113IWS71 to S75 and S170 to S174. Based on what you have done, control (promote) to a time saving state via relief time saving),
When the special condition is satisfied, the notification effect executing means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120, steps 113IWS806, S809, S845) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the time saving rush effect, the time saving promotion effect) for notifying the establishment is performed. Part)
The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied when the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display (for example,). The effect control CPU 120 is a gaming machine that executes a time saving promotion effect when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected).

According to such a configuration, when the special condition is satisfied while the special display result is controlled to the special state of the advantage corresponding to the derived display, it is possible to give a special feeling by the notification effect. You can improve your interest.

(Means 114-2) In the means 114-1, the notification effect executing means can execute the notification effect when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, and when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and the special state. When the special condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the notification effect is different (for example, the effect control CPU 120 enters the time saving state C when it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C by performing steps 113IWS806, S809, S845. The effect may be executed, and the time reduction promotion effect may be executed when the time reduction state B is controlled to the time reduction state C).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player and improve the interest by performing the notification effect in a manner suitable for the situation.

In this example, the fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the normal state and the fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the time reduction state are used to perform a notification effect during the fluctuation (time reduction rush effect, time reduction promotion effect). However, the execution timing of the notification effect is not limited to the change. For example, a fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the normal state and a fluctuation in which the relief time reduction counter = 0 in the time reduction state, during the symbol confirmation period from when the symbol is stopped to when the next fluctuation is started. The production mode of the notification effect to be performed may be different. In that case, a common effect may be performed as the effect during fluctuation.

(Means 114-3) In means 114-1 or means 114-2, a launch promotion notification (for example, display of a right-handed notification image shown in FIG. 8-42 (H)) for promoting the launch of a game medium toward a special route is displayed. ) Is provided (for example, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 in which steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845 are performed).
The launch promotion notification means can execute the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, while restricting the execution of the launch promotion notification when the special condition is satisfied in the special state (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 displays a right-handed notification image based on being controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state C (see FIG. 8-42 (H)), and is controlled from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C. Does not display the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 8-45 (D)). In FIG. 8-45 (D), the right-handed promotion image (under the small symbol) based on being controlled to the time saving state B. Although the displayed right-pointing arrow) is displayed, this right-handed promotion image is different from the right-handed notification image displayed based on the control of the time saving state C). May be good.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production.

If the execution of the launch promotion notification is restricted when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the execution of the launch promotion notification may be prohibited as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D). Alternatively, the launch promotion notification may be executed in a more passive manner than when the special conditions are satisfied in the normal state. For example, the display range may be reduced or an arrow may be transmitted to perform a launch promotion notification. Further, when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state, the image display device 5 having a high degree of attention of the player gives a launch promotion notification, while when the special condition is satisfied in the special state, the degree of attention of the player is the image display device 5. A lower light emitting member or speakers 8L, 8R may be used to perform launch promotion notification.

Further, as a launch promotion notification, the launch promotion notification means is a first launch promotion notification (for example, FIG. 8-42 (H)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special route when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state. The right-pointing arrow of reference) and the second launch promotion notification (for example, the right-pointing arrow in FIGS. 8-45 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the special path during the control of the special state. , Each of them can be executed in different modes, and when a special condition is satisfied in a special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, while the second launch promotion notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complication of the production while performing the notification according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-3, the effect mode of the notification effect is common between when the special condition is satisfied in the normal state and when the special condition is satisfied in the special state. (For example, the effect executed when the normal state is controlled to the time saving state C and the effect executed when the time saving state B is controlled to the time saving state C are common).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of fluctuation patterns and the number of effect data, and reduce the storage capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any of means 114-1 to 114-4, when the normal state is changed to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the variable display executed after the establishment of the special condition is subject to advance notice. While limiting the specific suggestion effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is N in step 113IWS1014, the step 113IWS1015 is executed), a special state having a low advantage (for example, for example) based on the establishment of the special condition. When shifting from a time saving state B) with a time saving number of 100 times to a special state with a high degree of advantage (for example, a time saving state C with a time saving number of 800 times), a specific suggestion is made for the variable display executed after the special condition is satisfied. It may be possible to execute the effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 113IWS1014, the effect can be executed in step 113IWS1019).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform a specific suggestion effect while suppressing the occurrence of defects in the effect.

(Means 114-6) In any of the means 114-1 to 114-5, the special suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the special suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition in the special state. The portion in which step 113IWS806 is executed regardless of whether or not the time is shortened) may be provided.

According to such a configuration, in a special state, it is possible to expect the establishment of special conditions and improve the interest.

It should be noted that the production mode of the special suggestion effect may be different between the normal state and the time saving state. For example, the character color of the countdown effect and the color and pattern of the effect of the effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any of means 114-1 to means 114-6, a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern other than the variation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) and a variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a shortened variable display pattern having a shortened display period (for example, variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4). The part of the computer 100 in which step S111 is performed) is provided.
In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result. When a specific display result is obtained, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern may be high (see FIGS. 8-6 (D) and (E)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, it is assumed that stress will be given to the player if the ratio of selecting the deviation of the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is high even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time. Therefore, the stress given to the player can be reduced by configuring the variation pattern having a short variation time to be easily selected in the out-of-time variation of the time reduction state via the relief time reduction.

(Means 114-8) In any of the means 114-1 to the means 114-7, a plurality of variable displays including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of the reach effect. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing step S111) for determining a variable display pattern from the pattern is provided.
In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled based on the derived display of the special display result. When a specific display result is obtained, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern may be low (see FIGS. 8-6 (D) and (E)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. For example, even though the relief time is shortened after playing the game for a long time, it is assumed that stress will be given to the player if the rate of selecting the reach loss is high, so the relief time is shortened. The stress given to the player can be reduced by configuring the variation pattern of the out-of-reach to be difficult to select in the short time state.

Further, conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, the number of times the symbol fluctuates is counted, and the count result reaches a value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 1000 times) without causing a big hit. Based on that (that is, based on performing a special number of fluctuations (for example, 1000 times) without a big hit), there was something controlled to a probabilistic state. Similarly, there is a device that controls the gaming state to a special state (for example, a time saving state in which the symbol variation is frequently executed) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449, there is room for improvement in control in the gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number of times. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) are described in the feature unit 113IW.

(Means 115-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
A first passage area (for example, a first start winning prize) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific route (for example, the left side region) can pass among a plurality of routes on which the game medium (for example, a game ball) can move. Mouth) and
A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, the right side region) different from the specific route can pass,
As the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the first identification information based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening) and the second start condition (for example, the second) Variable display of the second identification information based on the establishment of the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and the variable display executing means (for example, steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the variable display are executed. Part) and
Control to the time saving state A by performing step 113IWS537 in the state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the special state (for example, the time saving state) in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal state. A part, a part that is controlled to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166, and a part that is controlled to the time saving state C by performing step 113IWS171B).
It is provided with an updating means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing step 113IWS71) capable of updating numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). (Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The second starting condition is established based on the passing of the game medium through the second passing region.
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the execution number of the variable display, so that the special condition is set. When it is established, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 113IWS74, S75, S171B).
Based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can shorten the time by performing step 113IWS537. Control to state A),
A special state controlled after the advantageous state (for example, a time saving state via a jackpot (time saving state A)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a time saving state via a relief time saving (time saving state C)). )) With a special output means capable of executing a special output (for example, the output of the winning easy state designation signals 1 and 3) (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 in which steps 113IWS42B and S42F are performed). ,
In a specific output means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a specific output (for example, the output of the launch position designation signal 3) that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special path in the special state. , The part where step 113IWS35 is performed), and further
The specific output means can execute the specific output in common in the special state controlled after the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. A gaming machine characterized in that step 113IWS35 is performed in common regardless of which time reduction flag is set).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally identify the trigger for being controlled to the special state, and it is possible to standardize the specific signal. For example, it is possible to externally identify whether the trigger for being controlled in the time saving state is the occurrence of a big hit or the relief time saving.

Further, in this example, a signal output that can distinguish between the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief time saving is output to the test device, and either the time saving state via the jackpot or the time saving state via the relief time saving is performed. It is assumed that it is possible to output a signal that can specify that it should be right-handed even when it is controlled by, but similarly to an external device such as a hall management computer, the time saving state via a big hit It is possible to output a signal that can distinguish between the time saving state via the relief time saving and the time saving state via the relief time saving, and it is possible to specify that the right hit should be made regardless of whether the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot or the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be possible to output signals in common. As a result, in the hall management computer, it is possible to analyze the operation such as the relief time reduction arrival rate in actual operation and the customer base of the player when the relief time reduction is reached, and to standardize the signals. be able to.

(Means 115-2) In the means 115-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166).
The special output means is a special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, a time saving state via a time saving deviation (time saving state B)) and a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied (for example, a time saving state B). For example, it is possible to execute a special output (for example, the output of the winning easy state designation signals 2 and 3) that can be distinguished from the time saving state (time saving state C) via the relief time saving (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100). , Step 113 IWS42D, S42F).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally identify the opportunity to be controlled to the special state. For example, it is possible to externally identify whether the trigger for being controlled in the time saving state is the time saving out-of-time symbol stop or the relief time saving.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or the means 115-2, the state control means is in a special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166).
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 8-5 (A)).
When the special condition is satisfied and the special display result is derived and displayed, the state control means can be controlled to a special state having an advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 saves time). By prioritizing the control to the time saving state via the relief time saving (steps 113IWS170 to S174) over the control to the time saving state via the relief (step 113IWS153 to S168), the fluctuation (relief time saving number counter) that shortens the relief time. When the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in (variation that becomes = 0), it may be controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving).

According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 115-4) In any of the means 115-1 to the means 115-3, when the state control means derives and displays a special display result (for example, a time saving out-of-time symbol) different from the specific display result in the normal state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state B by performing step 113IWS166).
The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 8-5 (A)).
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the special condition is satisfied, the signal control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) that performs processing related to the output of a signal that can identify that the special display result is derived and displayed. Even if the variation is such that the relief time is shortened, the portion where step 113IWS37E is performed when the time reduction out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed) may be provided.

According to such a configuration, the display result can be appropriately notified to the outside.

The contents shown in the feature unit 113IW may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 116-1) to (means 119-6).

(Means 116-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
Numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) can be updated with an update means (for example, a portion in which the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100 is subtracted by 1 for each fluctuation).
It is provided with a special state control means (for example, a part for setting a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state.
The updating means updates the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). The relief time reduction counter is updated at the start of fluctuation of the symbol and at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol),
In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means has a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag based on the value of the relief time saving number counter being "0"). ,
When the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed, the notification effect executing means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing the notification effect notifying that the special condition is controlled based on the satisfaction of the special condition. A portion for executing the time saving rush effect when the value of the relief time saving number counter in the CPU 120 becomes "0") may be further provided.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 116-2) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
Numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) can be updated with an update means (for example, a portion in which the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100 is subtracted by 1 for each fluctuation).
It is provided with a special state control means (for example, a part for setting a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state.
The updating means updates the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). The relief time reduction counter is updated at the start of fluctuation of the symbol and at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol),
In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means has a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag based on the value of the relief time saving number counter being "0"). ,
When the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed, the notification effect executing means capable of executing the notification effect notifying that the special condition is controlled based on the satisfaction of the special condition ( For example, a portion for executing the time saving rush effect when the value of the relief time saving number counter in the effect control CPU 120 becomes "1") may be further provided.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 116-3) In the means 116-1, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a special variation pattern in the game control microcomputer 100). A part that performs processing to select one of multiple fluctuation patterns including)
The variable display pattern determination means is
When the special condition is satisfied, the special variable display pattern can be determined (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can select the special variation pattern when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". ),
Before the special condition is satisfied, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not select the special variable pattern when the value of the relief time reduction counter is other than "0"). ,
The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 enters the time saving as a variation effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the special variation pattern. The production can be performed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition by the notification effect.

(Means 116-4) In the means 116-2, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, one of a plurality of variable patterns in the game control microcomputer 100 is selected. The part that performs the processing to be performed)
The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined when the special condition is satisfied even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set. A common fluctuation pattern may be selected regardless of whether or not it is “0”).

According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-5) In any of means 116-1 to 116-4, the special state control means is advantageous depending on whether it is controlled to an advantageous state in a special state or a non-special state. After the end of the state, it is possible to control to a special state having different advantages (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a different number of time reductions depending on whether it is a big hit in the normal state or a big hit in the time saving state. Control to time saving),
When the variable display result of the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is a specific display result, the advantage of the special state controlled after the end of the advantageous state is determined (for example, assuming that the advantageous state is controlled in the special state). In the game control microcomputer 100, when the big hit symbol stops when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "0", even if the big hit is in the normal state, the big hit is obtained in the time reduction state. The number of times of control in the time saving state is determined by the same number of processes as in the case).

According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 116-6) In any of means 116-1 to 116-5, the game medium is divided into a first path (for example, a left-handed route) and a second route (for example, a right-handed route). Possible game areas and
A launch promotion notification means capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched toward either the first path or the second path (for example, the right in the image display device 5 in the effect control CPU 120). The part that displays the hitting instruction display and the left-handing instruction display)
The launch promotion notification means can execute a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched toward the second path when the notification effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a time saving rush effect. A right-handed instruction display may be displayed when it is executed).

According to such a configuration, the launch promotion notification can be appropriately executed.

(Means 116-7) In any of the means 116-1 to the means 116-6, the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition in response to the start of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to output a signal that can specify (for example, 4 jackpot signals) and a signal that can specify that the variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display (for example, a variable stop signal). It may be provided with a signal output means.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal that can be specified to be controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition to the outside at an appropriate timing.

(Means 117-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
Numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) can be updated with an update means (for example, a portion in which the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100 is subtracted by 1 for each fluctuation).
One or both of a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, a state in which the opening time of the second start winning opening is longer than in the normal state and a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the normal state). Special state control means (for example, a part in which the time saving flag is set in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to the time saving state including the state of
Variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol in the game control microcomputer 100). The part where fluctuations can be executed in parallel at the same time),
The first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information and the variable display period is high, and the variable display of the second identification information is the variable display of the first identification information. The shortened state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the variation of the first special symbol is the second special) that can be controlled to the second shortened state in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the variable display period. The first shortened state in which the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation of the symbol is easily selected, and the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation of the first special symbol are more likely to be selected. The second shortened state and the controllable part)
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). (Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means has a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a second start winning opening based on the value of the relief time reduction counter being "0". Controls to a time saving state that includes one or both of a state in which the opening time of the normal symbol is longer than the normal state and a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state).
The variable display execution means is
While the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, the identification information of the other identification information is based on the fact that a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the variable display is not derived and displayed (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "0" based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol. If it becomes, the change result of the 1st special symbol is not stopped and displayed),
A predetermined display result different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information based on the derivation display of the specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 can display the second special symbol as a display result of the second special symbol based on the fact that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol during the fluctuation of the second special symbol. Stop display of out-of-order symbols),
The shortened state control means can be controlled to the first shortened state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a value of the relief time reduction counter. The first shortened state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is more likely to select a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation of the second special symbol when the time is controlled to be shortened based on "0". It may also be controlled).

According to such a configuration, since the first shortened state is controlled after the special condition is satisfied, the game can proceed smoothly, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 117-2) In the means 117-1, the variable display executing means has a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be derived and displayed.
The special state control means is
It is possible to control the special display state based on the derivation display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can control the time saving state based on the stop display of the time saving out-of-time symbol). ,
When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the special state based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a relief time reduction counter. When the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation where the value of is "0", the time saving state can be controlled based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming "0"),
The advantage of the special state controlled based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, a game control microcomputer). 100 controls the time saving state over 800 times when the value of the relief time saving counter becomes "0", while the time saving over 100 times is based on the stop display of the time saving out-of-time symbol. It may be controlled to the state).

According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the relief degree of the player is increased. Can be done.

(Means 117-3) In means 117-1 or means 117-2, the special state control means is
During the execution of the variable display of the identification information which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and which is the special display result (for example, the time saving design), the identification information of the one is displayed. If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, a game). The control microcomputer 100 determines the number of relief time reductions when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "0" based on the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the time reduction deviation variation in the first special symbol. Control to shorten the time based on the value of the counter becoming "0"),
Even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, the special display result is not controlled to the special state of the advantage based on the derived display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has the first (1) Even when the time-saving out-of-time symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving state may not be controlled based on the time-saving out-of-time symbol being stopped and displayed).

According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is secured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 117-4) In any of means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display executing means is
As a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed.
While the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, and the identification information of the one is displayed. A predetermined display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the small hit symbol in the second special symbol during the execution of the variation of the first special symbol. , The out-of-order symbol can be stopped and displayed due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed in the unintended variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture. ..

(Means 117-5) In any of means 117-1 to 117-4, the updating means has a timing at which the variable display of the first identification information is started and a timing at which the variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

(Means 118-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
Numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) can be updated with an update means (for example, a portion in which the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100 is subtracted by 1 for each fluctuation).
One or both of a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (for example, a state in which the opening time of the second start winning opening is longer than in the normal state and a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the normal state). Special state control means (for example, a part in which the time saving flag is set in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to the time saving state including the state of
Variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol in the game control microcomputer 100). The part where fluctuations can be executed in parallel at the same time),
The first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is shorter than the variable display of the second identification information and the variable display period is high, and the variable display of the second identification information is the variable display of the first identification information. The shortened state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the variation of the first special symbol is the second special) that can be controlled to the second shortened state in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the variable display period. The first shortened state in which the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation of the symbol is easily selected, and the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation of the first special symbol are more likely to be selected. The second shortened state and the controllable part)
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). (Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
In the special state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means has a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a second start winning opening based on the value of the relief time reduction counter being "0". Controls to a time saving state that includes one or both of a state in which the opening time of the normal symbol is longer than the normal state and a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state).
The variable display execution means is
As a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result can be derived and displayed.
While the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, and the identification information of the one is displayed. In the variable display, it is possible to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a small hit symbol of the second special symbol during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Is stopped and displayed, and the out-of-order symbol can be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol.),
The shortened state control means can be controlled to the second shortened state when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a value of the relief time reduction counter. The second shortened state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is more likely to select a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation of the first special symbol when the time is controlled to be shortened based on "0". It may also be controlled).

According to such a configuration, while the variable display of one of the identification information is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Since the display result is derived and displayed and controlled to the second shortened state after the special condition is satisfied, the game can proceed smoothly and the interest can be improved.

(Means 118-2) In the means 118-1, the variable display executing means has a special display result different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, a symbol that is out of time) can be derived and displayed.
The special state control means is
It is possible to control the special display state based on the derivation display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can control the time saving state based on the stop display of the time saving out-of-time symbol). ,
When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the special state based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a relief time reduction counter. When the time saving out-of-time symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation where the value of is "0", the time saving state can be controlled based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming "0"),
The advantage of the special state controlled based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, a game control microcomputer). 100 controls the time saving state over 800 times when the value of the relief time saving counter becomes "0", while the time saving over 100 times is based on the stop display of the time saving out-of-time symbol. It may be controlled to the state).

According to such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, so that the relief degree of the player is increased. Can be done.

(Means 118-3) In the means 118-1 or the means 118-2, the special state control means is
During the execution of the variable display of the identification information which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and which is the special display result (for example, the time saving design), the identification information of the one is displayed. If a special condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, a game). The control microcomputer 100 determines the number of relief time reductions when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "0" based on the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the time reduction deviation variation in the first special symbol. Control to shorten the time based on the value of the counter becoming "0"),
Even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, the special display result is not controlled to the special state of the advantage based on the derived display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has the first (1) Even when the time-saving out-of-time symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving state may not be controlled based on the time-saving out-of-time symbol being stopped and displayed).

According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the advantage of the special state based on the establishment of the special condition is secured. It is possible to increase the degree of relief of the player.

(Means 118-4) In any of means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display executing means is
As a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed.
While the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, and the identification information of the one is displayed. A predetermined display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the small hit symbol in the second special symbol during the execution of the variation of the first special symbol. , The out-of-order symbol can be stopped and displayed due to the fluctuation of the first special symbol).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed in the unintended variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to minimize the effect of the player's intentional capture. ..

(Means 118-5) In any of the means 118-1 to the means 118-4, the updating means has a timing at which the variable display of the first identification information is started and a timing at which the variable display of the second identification information is started. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in the configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

(Means 119-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of.
Numerical information (for example, a relief time reduction counter) can be updated with an update means (for example, a portion in which the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100 is subtracted by 1 for each fluctuation).
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a part for setting a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100),
Specific state control means (for example, a part for setting the probability change flag in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a probability change state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state,
Termination determining means for determining to end the specific state by lottery in the specific state (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for determining whether or not to end the probabilistic state by lottery (falling lottery)).
A normal state control means that can be controlled to a normal state based on a determination by the end determination means (for example, a portion that resets the probability change flag based on the lottery result of the fall lottery in the game control microcomputer 100).
In relation to the control of the specific state, the notification effect executing means (for example, the probability change state in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect that can notify whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is derived and displayed is terminated. A part that executes a specific notification effect to notify whether to stop or display the jackpot symbol)
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is the first special). (Update the relief time reduction counter when the symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The special state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, so that the special condition is set. When it is established, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag based on the value of the relief time saving number counter being "0").
When the special condition is satisfied in the specific state, the special state can be controlled after the end determination means determines that the specific state is to be terminated after the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can be used. When the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "0" in the probability change state, the time is shortened after the relief time reduction counter value becomes "0" and after it is determined by the fall lottery that the probability change state ends. Controllable to state),
When a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, the notification effect executing means can notify by the notification effect that the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , When the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "0" in the probabilistic state, a specific notification effect is provided to notify that the relief time reduction counter is controlled to the time reduction state based on the value of the relief time reduction counter becoming "0". It may be feasible).

According to such a configuration, even when the specific state ends, the player is relieved because the notification effect notifies that the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition. It can be given and the interest can be improved.

(Means 119-2) In the means 119-1, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, a special information storage means that can store special information indicating the establishment of the special condition (for example, a probability change in the game control microcomputer 100). It is equipped with a part that sets a special flag based on the value of the relief time reduction counter becoming "0" in the state).
The special information may be erased based on being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special flag based on being controlled to the jackpot game state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in the specific state.

(Means 119-3) In means 119-1 or means 119-2, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, special information storage means (for example, for game control) capable of storing special information indicating that the special condition is satisfied. It is equipped with a part that sets a special flag based on the value of the relief time reduction counter becoming "0" in the probability change state of the microcomputer 100).
The special information is erased based on the fact that the special state is controlled after the specific state ends (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled based on the jackpot game state after the probability change state ends). To reset the special flag).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in the specific state.

(Means 119-4) In any of means 119-1 to 119-3, when a special condition is satisfied in a specific state, a special information storage means (for example, a special information storage means that can store special information indicating that the special condition is satisfied). It is equipped with a part that sets a special flag based on the value of the relief time reduction counter becoming "0" in the probability change state of the game control microcomputer 100).
The specific state control means can end the control of the specific state by executing the initialization process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the initialization process of the RAM 102).
The special information may be erased by executing the initialization process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special flag by performing the initialization process of the RAM 102).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately manage the information that the special condition is satisfied in the specific state.

(Means 119-5) In any of means 119-1 to 119-4, a special condition establishment notification effect executing means (for example,) capable of executing a special condition establishment notification effect for notifying that a special condition has been satisfied in a specific state. (A portion capable of executing the condition fulfillment notification effect for notifying that the value of the relief time reduction counter has become "0" in the probability change state in the effect control CPU 120) may be provided.

According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the special state is controlled after the end of the specific state, which can give the player a sense of security and improve the interest.

(Means 119-6) In any of the means 119-1 to 119-5, the special state control means is said to be used when the specific state is completed by the time the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the specific state. It is possible to control the special state until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs 100 times when the probability change state ends before 100 times of fluctuations in the probability change state. It can be controlled to shorten the time),
The notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect that notifies whether the specific state ends or the specific display result is displayed when the variable display is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 may execute a specific notification effect for notifying whether to end the probability change state or stop and display the jackpot symbol when the fluctuation is performed 100 times or more).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of tension to the player and improve the interest.

Further, the contents shown in the feature unit 113IW may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 105-1) to (means 108-15).

(Means 105-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. The possible state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 113IWS166, S171B, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) are updated based on the execution of the variable display. A possible updating means (for example, a portion for executing step 113IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the state control means is advantageous based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. After being controlled to the state, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can be controlled to the time saving state A via the jackpot by performing step 113IWS537), and the numerical value updated by the updating means. When the information becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It is possible (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can control the time saving state C via the relief time saving by performing step 113IWS171B), and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on the case and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 reduces the number of relief times when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes. (Update the counter), there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state (for example, 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (for example, 10R jackpot B), and the advantageous state is controlled to any of the plurality of types. The advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the situation, and the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. It is higher than the advantage of the special state to be performed (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and after the 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to the time saving state until the next big hit occurs. The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state (for example, mainly after the 10R jackpot A). It may be controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and may be controlled to the time saving state of 800 times as the time saving state via the relief time saving (see FIG. 8-5 (A)). According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 105-2) It is controlled to an advantageous state when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. After that, the ratio controlled to the special state of special advantage (for example, the time saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) is different (for example, the big hit type when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). (See Fig. 8-4)), when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The number of times the variable display is executed for the special condition to be satisfied is the same for the special number of times (for example, after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and after the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The number of fluctuations required to shorten the relief time after a big hit is 800, which is common). According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

(Means 105-3) The disadvantage setting value (for example, the setting value "1") in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability (for example, about 1/319) and the control in the more advantageous state than the first probability. A setting capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, setting value "6") which is a second probability (for example, about 1/270) having a high probability of being set. When the means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) are provided and the disadvantage setting value is set, the special condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the advantage setting value is set (Fig. 8-5 (Fig. 8-5 (Fig. 8-5)). B)), the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, the main The time saving state may be controlled to 100 times, and the time saving state may be controlled to 800 times as the time saving state via the relief time saving (see FIG. 8-5 (A)). According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 105-4) An advantageous state is provided with a setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types is controlled to the special state of the advantage after being controlled to is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is any). It is common regardless of whether the set value is set (see Fig. 8-4)), and the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is when any set value is set. (For example, the length of the time saving state via the relief time saving may be common regardless of which set value is set (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

(Means 105-5) Of a plurality of types, there are a case where the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by a variable display and a case where the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different (see Fig. 8-4), and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same as when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In both the case and the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is possible to control to the time saving state of 800 times (see FIG. 8-5 (A)). good. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

(Means 105-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-2) in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including ~ PA1-4) is provided. Is shortened and variable when the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result in the variable display state than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The rate of determining the display pattern is high (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 8-6 (E) in the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, and in the time reduction state via the jackpot. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern tables C and H shown in FIGS. 8-6 (C) and 8-6 (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time saving state in which the fluctuation time is short) based on playing the game for a long period of time. ..

(Means 105-7) A variable display pattern determining means (means 105-7) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of a reach effect. For example, the variable display pattern determining means is controlled after the special state, which is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is controlled to be more advantageous than the portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100). When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the special state (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, FIG. 8-6. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in (E), and the fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 8-7 (H) in the time saving state via the jackpot). .. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on the game being played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 105-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, a time reduction counter) different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means is special. The special state can be controlled by setting information (for example, a time saving flag), and the special state can be terminated by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information is stored a predetermined number of times (for example,). , 100 times), the special state is terminated based on the predetermined value (for example, the value of the time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means updates the numerical information and the specific numerical value even if the power supply is stopped. Backup when a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on) are satisfied. An initialization means (for example, a portion for executing steps S8 and 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the stored contents of the storage means is provided, and the initialization means is provided when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Initializes the setting information of special information and specific numerical information, and does not initialize the numerical information (for example, resets the presence / absence of the time saving flag set and the value of the time saving counter, but does not reset the value of the relief time saving counter. ) May be. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 106-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. The possible state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 113IWS166, S171B, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) are updated based on the execution of the variable display. A possible update means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 113IWS71) and a starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) are satisfied. Execution of the variable display executing means (for example, steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, neither the jackpot game state nor the variable state) is satisfied. And the hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer, the second hold storage buffer) that can store information about the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. A backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and hold information when the power supply is stopped, and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on). ) Is established, when the initialization means that can initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means (for example, the part that executes steps S8 and 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply are started. , Recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the backup storage means (for example, step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state control means includes a specific value (for example, the number of times of saving time for relief) corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed for the numerical information updated by the updating means. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by setting the counter value: 0) (example). For example, the game control microcomputer 100 can control the time saving state C via the relief time saving by performing step 113IWS171B), and after the recovery control is executed, the variable display corresponding to the recovered hold information is displayed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution (see FIG. 8-50), and the updating means is a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the variable display of the second identification information is variably displayed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player when a power failure occurs while optimizing the control by initialization.

(Means 106-2) It is controlled to an advantageous state when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. After that, the ratio controlled to the special state of special advantage (for example, the time saving state that continues until the next big hit occurs) is different (for example, the big hit type when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). (See Fig. 8-4)), when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The number of times the variable display is executed for the special condition to be satisfied is the same for the special number of times (for example, after a big hit based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol and after the fluctuation of the second special symbol. The number of fluctuations required to shorten the relief time after a big hit is 800, which is common). According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

(Means 106-3) The disadvantage setting value (for example, the setting value "1") in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability (for example, about 1/319) and the control in the more advantageous state than the first probability. A setting capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value (for example, setting value "6") which is a second probability (for example, about 1/270) having a high probability of being set. When the means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) are provided and the disadvantage setting value is set, the special condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the advantage setting value is set (Fig. 8-5 (Fig. 8-5 (Fig. 8-5)). B)), the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, after the 10R jackpot A, the main The time saving state may be controlled to 100 times, and the time saving state may be controlled to 800 times as the time saving state via the relief time saving (see FIG. 8-5 (A)). According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 106-4) An advantageous state is provided with setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types is controlled to the special state of the advantage after being controlled to is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is any). It is common regardless of whether the set value is set (see Fig. 8-4)), and the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is when any set value is set. (For example, the length of the time saving state via the relief time saving may be common regardless of which set value is set (see FIG. 8-5 (A))). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

(Means 106-5) Of a plurality of types, there are a case where the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by a variable display and a case where the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by a variable display. The ratio of which advantageous state is controlled is different (see Fig. 8-4), and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same as when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In both the case and the case of controlling to the time saving state via the relief time saving based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is possible to control to the time saving state of 800 times (see FIG. 8-5 (A)). good. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

(Means 106-6) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-2) in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including ~ PA1-4) is provided. Is shortened and variable when the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result in the variable display state than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The rate of determining the display pattern is high (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 8-6 (E) in the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, and in the time reduction state via the jackpot. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 8-7 (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time saving state in which the fluctuation time is short) based on playing the game for a long period of time. ..

(Means 106-7) A variable display pattern determining means (means 106-7) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to execution of a reach effect. For example, the variable display pattern determining means is controlled after the special state, which is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is controlled to be more advantageous than the portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100). When the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the special state (for example, in the case of out-of-order fluctuation, in the time saving state via the relief time saving, FIG. 8-6. The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in (E), and the fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table H shown in FIG. 8-7 (H) in the time saving state via the jackpot). .. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest is suppressed by shifting to a special state in which the game speed is high (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on the game being played for a long period of time. be able to.

(Means 106-8) The updating means can update specific numerical information (for example, a time reduction counter) different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means is special. The special state can be controlled by setting information (for example, a time saving flag), and the special state can be terminated by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information is stored a predetermined number of times (for example,). , 100 times), the special state is terminated based on the predetermined value (for example, the value of the time reduction counter: 0), and the updating means updates the numerical information and the specific numerical value even if the power supply is stopped. Backup when a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding information and setting information of special information and a predetermined condition (for example, the output signal from the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on) are satisfied. An initialization means (for example, a portion for executing steps S8 and 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the stored contents of the storage means is provided, and the initialization means is provided when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Initializes the setting information of special information and specific numerical information, and does not initialize the numerical information (for example, resets the presence / absence of the time saving flag set and the value of the time saving counter, but does not reset the value of the relief time saving counter. ) May be. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-1) Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is executed. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) based on the derivation display, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. The possible state control means (for example, the part that executes steps 113IWS166, S171B, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the numerical information (for example, the relief time reduction counter) are updated based on the execution of the variable display. The state control means includes a possible update means (for example, a portion for executing step 113IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means has a special number of times (for example, the number of times the numerical information updated by the update means is executed as a variable display execution number). For example, by setting a specific value corresponding to (800 times) (for example, the value of the relief time reduction counter: 0), it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). , Step 113IWS171B can be controlled to the time saving state C via the relief time saving), and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Numerical information is updated in some cases (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes), and is related to the establishment of the special condition. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 113IWS806 and S254) that can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a fanning effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, and a telop display effect) is further provided, and the suggestion effect is provided. Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, the execution means differs in the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the suggestion effect is executed (for example, in the countdown effect, the selection ratio of the numerical value to be displayed differs (until the relief time is shortened). The value according to the remaining number of times is selected at a rate of 100%, but the value to be displayed at the rate according to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened may be determined by lottery), and the effect is displayed in the effect production. The range to be used is different (displayed at a rate of 100% according to the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened, but it depends on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. The range to be displayed may be determined by lottery), the color of the telop display area is different in the telop display effect (see FIGS. 8-31 (C) and (D)), and the effect mode of the suggestion effect is May suggest a period until the special condition is satisfied (see FIGS. 8-41, 8-42, 8-49). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The effect mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the countdown effect) is an mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied can be specified (see FIGS. 8-41 and 8-42). It may be that. According to such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified of the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 107-3) The suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a specific image (for example, an effect effect of displaying an effect image), and the specific image is a color and size (size of a single image and a plurality of images). At least one of the display ranges (including the size of the display range) is displayed in a plurality of different modes, and the period until the special condition suggested by which mode is displayed is different (FIGS. 8-41 and 8-41). (See 42). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the aspect of the specific image.

(Means 107-4) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the changing state) is satisfied. When the variable display executing means (for example, the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of Hold storage means (for example, first hold storage buffer, second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and hold storage that is not executed and is stored in the hold storage means. A predetermined image display means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 113IWS256) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) is displayed, and the suggestion effect execution means is predetermined. When the image is displayed, the suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) can be executed (for example, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect can be executed in duplicate. The display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect). As for the execution order of and, whichever comes first or at the same time), when a predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect may be different (see FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-5) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the changing state) is satisfied. When the variable display executing means (for example, the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of Hold storage means (for example, first hold storage buffer, second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and hold storage that is not executed and is stored in the hold storage means. A predetermined image display means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 113IWS256) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) is displayed, and the suggestion effect execution means is predetermined. When the image is displayed, the suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) can be executed (for example, the telop display effect and the demo movie effect can be executed in duplicate. The display of the predetermined image and the suggestion effect). As for the execution order of and, whichever comes first or at the same time), when a predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. In addition, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect may differ depending on the predetermined mode (see FIGS. 8-31 (C) and (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-6) The starting condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is satisfied and the starting condition (for example, neither the jackpot gaming state nor the changing state) is satisfied. When the variable display executing means (for example, the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of Hold storage means (for example, first hold storage number buffer, second hold storage number buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and hold storage is stored in the hold storage means because variable display is not executed. A predetermined image display means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 113IWS256) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) when the predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) is displayed, and the suggestion effect execution means is predetermined. When the image is displayed, the game medium has passed the detection that the operating means (for example, the ball striking operation handle 30) has been operated and the predetermined area (for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue effect by voice output) based on the fact that at least one of the detections has been performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and a suggestion effect is produced. The execution means may have a different ratio of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the telop display effect) depending on which set value is set (see FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and a suggestion effect is produced. Depending on which set value is set, the execution means executes a suggestion effect (for example, a telop display effect) depending on a specific mode (for example, “red”) (FIG. 8-31 (C)). , (D)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

(Means 107-9) Set as a setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) in which one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state can be set. A setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 of the first modification 1 that executes the setting suggestion effect as a fluctuating effect) that can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is provided and set. The ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which set value the suggestion effect execution means is set to (see FIG. 8-51 (A)), and the suggestion effect execution means is set to any set value. Even when it is set, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect may be the same (see FIG. 8-51 (C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control.

(Means 107-10) Set as a setting means (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) in which one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state can be set. A setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 of the first modification 1 that executes the setting suggestion effect as a fluctuating effect) that can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is provided and set. The ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the special mode (for example, the second aspect) of the suggestion effect execution means depending on which set value is set (see FIG. 8-51 (B)), and the suggestion effect is produced. Regardless of which set value is set, the execution means may have a common ratio of executing the suggestion effect in a specific mode (for example, “red”) (see FIG. 8-51 (D)). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complication of control.

(Means 107-11) The suggestion effect executing means is a case where the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and a case where the recovery process is executed, and in a specific period after the power supply is started. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the display of the initial result according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened) is different (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 113 IWS630 at the time of recovery from the power failure, while the ram clear switch is pressed. If the initialization process is performed, step 113 IWS630 may not be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-12) Variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2). The variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and the special variable display pattern can be determined before the special condition is satisfied. When the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed without determining (for example, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 can be changed only when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0). Further, a specific notification effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 113IWS809 and S845) capable of executing a specific notification effect (for example, a time saving rush effect) for notifying that the device is controlled to a special state is further added. It may be prepared. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. Can be improved.

(Means 107-13) A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 without reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern (for example, reach effect) having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 and PB2-1 to PB2-3). A portion for executing step S111) is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means determines the specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the variable display display result is the specific display result or not. It is possible (see FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (Fig. 8-Fig. 8-). 6 (A)), the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the variable period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 times or less) is the period before the predetermined period (for example, the relief time is shortened). When the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than the remaining number of times until 11 times or more (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened). When the number of times is 11 or more, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), and when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, FIG. 8-7 (F), The fluctuation pattern may be selected using the fluctuation pattern table in which the selection ratio of the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in (G) is changed to 0%). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-14) A notice effect executing means (for example, step 113IWS802A in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is executed. The notice effect execution means can execute the notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result does not become the specific display result (FIG. 8-Fig. 8-). 35 (A), (B)), when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is higher than when the display result is not the specific display result (Fig. 8-35 (Fig. 8-35 (Fig. 8-35 (Fig. 8-35)). A), (B)), the advance notice effect is executed when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. The ratio may be low (see FIGS. 8-35 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 107-15) A notice effect executing means (for example, step 113IWS802A in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is executed. The notice effect executing means has a specific mode (for example, "red") and a predetermined mode regardless of whether the variable display display result is a specific display result or not. (For example, "blue") allows the advance notice effect to be executed (see FIGS. 8-35 (C) and (D)), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, a specific mode is used rather than a predetermined mode. (See FIGS. 8-35 (C) and (D)), and the predetermined period before the special conditions are satisfied is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect depending on the specific mode may be low (see FIGS. 8-35 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 100-1) to (means 104-1-2) may be applied to the feature unit 113IW and each modification.

(Means 100-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a time saving in a game control microcomputer 100). A part for setting a flag) and an update means for updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, a part for updating the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100). The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is relieved. The time saving flag is set according to the value of the time saving number counter becoming 0), and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

In addition, when a big hit occurs, the initial value may be set in the relief time reduction counter, or a plurality of types of big hits (a big hit without a time reduction, a big hit with a small number of game balls acquired, a second special symbol). (Big hit, etc.) may be provided so that the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set for some big hits.

In the normal state, the first special symbol may be mainly changed, or the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in the normal state. good.

(Means 100-2) In the means 100-1, the special condition is based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed a special number of times as the display result of the variable display. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may set the time saving flag based on the stop display of the time saving out-of-time symbol). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game because the display result, which is disadvantageous to the player, is relieved when the display result is continuously derived and displayed.

(Means 100-3) In the means 100-1 or the means 100-2, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state). It may be configured to do so. According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being once controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so that it can be controlled to the special state until it is substantially controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, the investment of the player can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the player can be prevented.

The relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability change state), low probability high base (time reduction state), and high probability low base (latent probability change). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it can be applied to a gaming machine that executes a lottery for falling to a normal state in a probabilistic state.

The second special symbol may be preferentially digested, or a variable winning ball device 6B may be provided at the first starting winning opening, and a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently may be provided. Alternatively, the game balls may be digested in the order of winning, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to fluctuate at the same time.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be provided, or only the first special symbol may be provided.

(Means 100-4) In any one of means 100-1 to means 100-3, the updating means sets numerical information as an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a game control microcomputer 100. It may be configured to set a predetermined value (for example, 800) in the relief time reduction counter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 100-5) In the means 100-4, the predetermined condition is that the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a predetermined value in the relief time reduction counter based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 becomes a big hit. (For example, 800) may be set). According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 100-6) In the means 100-4, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. The predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a predetermined value (for example, 800) on the relief time reduction counter based on the stop display of the time reduction deviation symbol. It may be configured to set). According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to a special state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 100-7) In the means 100-4, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the relief time reduction counter becoming 0). It may be configured to set a predetermined value (for example, 800) in the relief time reduction counter. According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 100-8) The means 100-4 includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped. , The update means sets the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the initial value when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of the initialization process) (for example, step 113 IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part to be executed), the predetermined condition may be configured so that the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the part to execute step S8 and step 113IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the initialization is performed in the amusement park, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained, it may be too disadvantageous for the amusement park, so it is operated for the amusement park. It can be made easier.

(Means 100-9) Any one of the means 100-1 to the means 100-8 is provided with an effect control means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172) corresponding to variable display, and state control is provided. The means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a relief time reduction number of times in which 800 is set. Based on the fact that the counter becomes 0, a value of 800 or more is set in the time reduction counter), and it is possible to control the special state for a specific period again based on the variable display of the special number being executed in the special state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state via the relief time saving again based on the fluctuation of 800 times in the time saving state via the relief time saving), the effect control means is the first time. It may be configured to execute different effects in the specific period of the above and the specific period of the second time. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the situation is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time, so measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display should be taken. By changing the production mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 100-10) Any one of the means 100-1 to the means 100-8 is provided with an effect control means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172) corresponding to variable display, and state control is provided. The means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a relief time reduction number of times in which 800 is set. Based on the fact that the counter becomes 0, a value of 800 or more is set in the time reduction counter), and it is possible to control the special state for a specific period again based on the variable display of the special number being executed in the special state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state via the relief time saving again based on the fluctuation of 800 times in the time saving state via the relief time saving), the effect control means is the first time. It may be configured to execute a common effect in the specific period of the above and the specific period of the second time. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. Therefore, by intentionally performing the same effect, the advantageous state is obtained for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 101-1-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. For example, a gaming area in which a gaming machine can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game medium can be divided into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path). And the state control means that can control the special state (for example, the time saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than the normal state (for example, the part where the time saving flag is set in the game control computer 100) and the variable display are executed. A plurality of types including an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution (for example, a part for updating the relief time reduction counter in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control. A process execution means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state required for executing a process and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by making the numerical information updated by the update means a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a game control micro). The computer 100 sets the time saving flag according to the value of the relief time saving count counter becoming 0), and the updating means is that the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is performed. Numerical information is updated depending on the case of execution (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes), and the processing execution means is , When the data value is the first numerical value, the first process related to the variable display is executed (for example, the portion where steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is different from the first numerical value. When the second process related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, the portion where steps S114 to S117 are executed in the game control computer 100) and the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The state control means executes a third process for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 reduces the relief time when the value of the special figure process flag is "11". Number of times cow Check the value of the input, and if it is 0, execute the next fluctuation postponement process that sets the time reduction flag), in the normal state, the game medium is fired to the first path, and the game is performed, and in the special state, the game is performed. A launch promotion notification means (for example, for effect control) that launches a game medium to the second path to perform a game, and executes a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process. The CPU 120 is provided with a right-handed notification effect during execution of the next fluctuation postponement process). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 101-1-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. For example, a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, a game control microcomputer 100). (The part that sets the time saving flag in A process execution means (for example,) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including display control and advantageous state control, and executes a process corresponding to the data value. A portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step S25), and the state control means is provided when a special condition is satisfied when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a time saving flag according to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), and the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the first special symbol is executed or the second identification information is variablely displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 changes the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Occasionally, the relief time reduction counter is updated), and the process execution means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control computer 100). Part), when the data value is a second value different from the first value, the second process related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, the part where steps S114 to S117 in the game control computer 100 are executed), and the data value is the first. When the first numerical value and the third numerical value are different from the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control computer 100 has a special figure. When the value of the process flag is "11", the value of the relief time reduction counter is checked, and when it is 0, the next fluctuation postponement process that sets the time reduction flag is executed), special during the execution of the third process. Control the state An effect execution means for executing an effect for notifying that it is to be controlled (for example, in the effect control CPU 120, executing an effect for notifying that the time is controlled to a time reduction state via a relief time reduction during execution of the next fluctuation postponement process. It is characterized by having a part to be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

It should be noted that the processing related to the jackpot may be prioritized, or the processing related to the variable display and the processing related to the relief time reduction may be prioritized.

In the next fluctuation postponement process, which is the third process, the right-handed notification may be performed, or only the mode transition effect suggesting the transition to the time saving state is executed without performing the right-handed notification. May be good.

(Means 101-2) In the means 101-1 and the means 101-1-2, the processing execution means is the first after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to steps S114 to S117 instead of the next fluctuation postponement processing when the fluctuation at which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 is a jackpot fluctuation). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, since the control of the advantageous state is prioritized, the result is not disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 101-3) In means 101-1-1, means 101-2 or means 101-2, the updating means updates numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, a game control microcomputer). The computer 100 subtracts the value of the relief time reduction counter at the start of fluctuation), and the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time reduction flag C based on the value of the relief time reduction counter), and when the state control means controls the special state, the special information is second information. To the first information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the time saving flag C at the end of the time saving state), and executes different processing depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may select a variation pattern using a variation pattern table that differs depending on whether the time saving flag C is set or not). .. According to such a configuration, the process of shifting to the special state can be suitably executed by managing the special information.

(Means 101-4) The means 101-3 includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern for variable display, and determines the variable display pattern. The means may be configured to determine different variable display patterns when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 101-5) The means 101-3 includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern for variable display, and determines the variable display pattern. The means determines a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the time saving flag C is set. It may be configured to select a variation pattern that has a different definite display period depending on whether it is present or not). According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 102-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the game, and an effect corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a production control means for controlling (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A controllable state control means (for example, a part for setting a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means for updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, for game control). A portion for updating the relief time reduction counter in the microcomputer 100) and a state information control means for controlling state information capable of identifying the state controlled by the state control means (for example, each time reduction flag in the game control microcomputer 100). The state control means can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Yes (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag after the end of the jackpot game state), and when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag according to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 changes the first special symbol and the second special symbol). The state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time reduction flag when controlling to the normal state). (Reset), the state information is the second numerical value when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, and then the state information is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag A after the jackpot ends), and when the special state is controlled based on the satisfaction of the special condition, the state information is set to the first numerical value and the second numerical value. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag C), and the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and is in a state when it is in a special state. Specific information can be transmitted depending on whether the information is a second numerical value or a third numerical value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 has a time saving state A designation command and a time saving state C designation command. Can be transmitted). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

As specific information, a time saving state A designation command or a time saving state C designation command may be transmitted, or a background specification command or a fluctuation pattern command may be sent during a time saving state via a jackpot or during a time saving state via a time saving loss. , It may be configured to transmit in an identifiable manner that it is in the time saving state via the relief time saving. In addition, for example, when a big hit occurs, a big hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes depending on the game state, and depending on which command is received. It may be configured so that the fanfare period and the ending period change.

(Means 102-2) In the means 102-1, the state information control means sets the state information to the first numerical value and the first numerical value when the special condition is satisfied again after being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. The second numerical value and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value may be set (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a dedicated time saving flag D when the relief time is shortened again). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 102-3) In the means 102-1 or the means 102-2, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means. However, it is possible to execute different effects when the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special conditions (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a time saving state via a jackpot and a time saving state via a relief time saving. It may be configured to perform different effects with. According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 102-4) In any of means 102-1 to 102-3, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result. It is possible to execute a common effect when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a time saving state via a jackpot and a time saving via a relief time saving). It may be configured to display a common background image in the time saving state of. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 102-5) In any of the means 102-1 to the means 102-4, when the state control means derives and displays a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result in the normal state. It is possible to control to a special state, and the effect control means controls the special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means satisfies the special condition. It is possible to execute different effects when the special state is originally controlled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs different effects depending on the time saving state via the time saving loss and the time saving state via the relief time saving). It may have been done. According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 102-6) In any of means 102-1 to 102-4, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. , The effect control means controls the special state when the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured so that a common effect can be executed between time and time (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a common effect in the time saving state via the time saving loss and the time saving state via the relief time saving). .. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 103-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the game, and an effect corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a production control means for controlling (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. A controllable state control means (for example, a part for setting a time saving flag in the game control computer 100) and an update means for updating numerical information based on execution of variable display (for example, for game control). A portion for updating the relief time reduction counter in the microcomputer 100) and a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is relieved. The time saving flag is set according to the value of the time saving count counter becoming 0), and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the first special symbol fluctuates and the second special symbol fluctuates), and the game control means starts power supply. When this is done, predetermined information can be transmitted to the effect control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 113IWS11), and the effect control means supplies power based on the reception of the predetermined information. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed in a predetermined period after the start of (for example, a portion where step 113IWS630 is executed in the effect control CPU 120). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, and to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

It should be noted that the initial appearance may be displayed as a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, or the suggestion effect may be executed by changing the background, changing the effect up to 100 rotations, or displaying on the demo screen or menu screen. It may be configured as.

When the command for specifying the initialization is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect.

(Means 103-2) In the means 103-1, the game control means can transmit specific information that can identify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when the power supply is started. (For example, the part that executes step 113IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, increase the operating rate of the game machine, and suppress the increase in the processing load.

At the time of recovery, a command that can specify the value of the relief time reduction counter may be sent, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in 100 rotation units, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, ... 500 to 599. It is configured to send a command that can specify that the rotation is within a predetermined range, such as that the rotation can be specified. You may.

(Means 103-3) In means 103-1 or means 103-2, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in connection with the execution of the variable display (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 transmits various commands at the start of fluctuation), and the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on specific information. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS804 in), as specific information, first specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, (For example, a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1) and a second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2). It may be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss and preferably realize processing related to specific information.

When the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the number of times of relief time 2 specified, may be transmitted, or the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times When the difference between

(Means 103-4) In any of means 103-1 to means 103-3, when the effect control means satisfies the special condition based on the execution of the first predetermined number of variable displays less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the special state is controlled, and every time the second predetermined number of variable displays, which is less than the first predetermined number, is executed before the special number of variable displays is executed. The suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may execute step 113IWS804). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, the risk of unknowingly causing a loss can be reduced.

The effect may be executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter, or the effect control CPU 120 may count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter. May be good.

(Means 104-1-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. For example, it corresponds to a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling a game and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state). The game control means includes a production control means for controlling the production (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A state control means that can control the state (for example, a part that sets a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, a game). A portion of the control computer 100 that updates the relief time reduction counter), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can hold numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped, and predetermined When the condition is satisfied, the initialization means (for example, step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means including the information regarding the number of times that the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, the part to be executed). The game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag according to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction count counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and the backup. When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the storage means are initialized, and then the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. When it is controlled to a special state, a different effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a time saving state via a relief time saving after the initialization process is performed and before being controlled to a big hit. , The effect is different from the case where the initialization process is performed, the jackpot is controlled, and then the time is controlled via the relief time saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Means 104-1-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. For example, it corresponds to a game control means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling a game and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state). The game control means includes a production control means for controlling the production (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172), and the game control means is in a special state (for example, a time saving) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A state control means that can control the state (for example, a part that sets a time saving flag in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, a game). A portion of the control computer 100 that updates the relief time reduction counter), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) that can hold numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped, and predetermined When the condition is satisfied, the initialization means (for example, step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means including the information regarding the number of times that the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed. The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, the part to be executed). The game control microcomputer 100 sets the time saving flag according to the value of the relief time saving number counter becoming 0), and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction count counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and the backup. When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the storage means are initialized, and then the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It is controlled to a special state and then a different effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a time saving state via a relief time saving after the initialization process is performed and before the jackpot is controlled. After the initialization process is performed, the jackpot is controlled and then the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving, and the effect is different after the time saving state). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling the specific display result to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the derivation display.
A variable display execution means that can execute variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied,
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met.
A decidable means capable of deciding to control to the advantageous state,
Before the determination by the determination means, the determination means capable of determining that the advantageous state is controlled, and the determination means.
A specific suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a specific suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled based on the determination result by the determination means, and a specific suggestion effect executing means.
A state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal state, and
Equipped with an update means that can update numerical information,
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed.
The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by setting the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed.
Further provided with a special suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the special suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition,
The specific suggestion effect execution means is
Among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific suggestion effect for which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is subject to advance notice can be restricted. can be,
A game characterized in that execution of the specific suggestion effect is restricted during a predetermined period from a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times less than the special number of times the numerical information updated by the update means reaches the specific value. Machine.

Images